Udemy 2 Flashcards
Question 1:
Which of the following is an agile technique that regularly checks the effectiveness of the quality process, looks for the root cause of issues, and suggests trials of new approaches to improve quality?
Retrospectives
Backlog refinement
User stories
Sprints
Correct answerRetrospectivesBacklog refinementUser storiesSprintsOverall explanationRecurring retrospectives regularly check on the effectiveness of the quality process. They look for the root cause of issues and suggest trials of new approaches to improve quality. PMBOK Guide 6 Page 276.
Question 2:
In an Agile environment, the facilitator and coach for the project team is known as:
Functional manager
Servant-leader
Product owner
Project sponsor
Functional managerCorrect answerServant-leaderProduct ownerProject sponsorOverall explanationIn an Agile environment, project managers are servant-leaders, changing their emphasis to coaching people who want help, fostering greater collaboration on the team, and aligning stakeholder needs. Agile Practice Guide, Page 38.
Question 3:
Your team collected the technical requirements of the new fire fighting system for your building, and they have defined the project scope. Which of the following approaches would you recommend using on this project?
Agile
Iterative
Predictive
Incremental
AgileIterativeCorrect answerPredictive IncrementalOverall explanationSince the project requirements are known and the project scope is defined, a predictive approach is most suitable in this case. PMBOK 6, page 19
Question 4:
An experienced team familiar with the Waterfall project management approach is now assigned to their first Agile project. To ease the transition, some elements of the Waterfall approach have been retained. However, a misunderstanding among the development team has resulted in duplicated efforts. How can the development team resolve this issue?
Bring up the topic during the upcoming iteration retrospective
Submit a change request to update the communications management plan
Fallback to a waterfall project management framework going forward
Do nothing since the team members are transitioning from waterfall to agile
Correct answerBring up the topic during the upcoming iteration retrospectiveSubmit a change request to update the communications management planFallback to a waterfall project management framework going forwardDo nothing since the team members are transitioning from waterfall to agileOverall explanationRegularly scheduled retrospectives can be used on any project, be it predictive, agile, or hybrid. Retrospectives provide the project team an opportunity to learn from their previous work, investigate issues, and improve and adapt their processes. Agile Practice Guide, Page 50
Question 5:
Timely business decisions are important for the success of your new ERP system project. From an Agile perspective, who makes business decisions?
Functional managers
Product owner
Servant-leader
End-User
Functional managersCorrect answerProduct ownerServant-leaderEnd-UserOverall explanationIn an Agile environment, product owners make decisions on behalf of business stakeholders. Agile Practice Guide, Page 41.
Question 6:
You are hired as an agile expert for an organization in a transition phase from the predictive to the agile approach in project management. The organization has recently embarked upon the Agile journey. Which of the following is not a change-friendly characteristic for organizations beginning to use Agile approaches?
Executive management commitment
Focus on short-term budgeting and metrics versus long-term goals.
Existence of departmental silos
Talent management maturity and capabilities.
Executive management commitmentFocus on short-term budgeting and metrics versus long-term goals.Correct answerExistence of departmental silosTalent management maturity and capabilities.Overall explanationWhen the work is decomposed into departmental silos, it creates dependencies that prevent accelerated delivery, instead of building cross-functional teams with guidance from centers of competencies. Agile Practice Guide, Page 74.
Question 7:
In your Agile project, some team members have reported that they are working overtime to complete their assigned work. This issue could be a sign of a problem in the team’s capacity to complete the work within the sprint timeframe. What should you do to resolve this issue?
Set a proper WIP limits
Call the team for a retrospective meeting
Launch a root cause analysis
Establish working agreements
Correct answerSet a proper WIP limitsCall the team for a retrospective meetingLaunch a root cause analysisEstablish working agreementsOverall explanationThe problem is unmanageable WIP. The solution is to limit the WIP based on team’s capacity. Agile Practice Guide, Page 66.
Question 8:
Compared to traditional predictive approaches, Agile methodologies are known to deliver better user experiences of project deliverables. This is due to
Early development of an exhaustive product backlog.
Relying less on processes and more on documentation.
Early and continual involvement of users.
Relying less on documentation and more on processes.
Early development of an exhaustive product backlog.Relying less on processes and more on documentation.Correct answerEarly and continual involvement of users.Relying less on documentation and more on processes.Overall explanationAgile approaches promise a better user experience of project deliverables through the early and continual involvement of users. Exhaustive product backlogs are not developed in Agile projects; that would be a waterfall approach. Working products are more valuable than documentation and processes. Agile Practice Guide, Page 58.
Question 9:
As the manager of an ERP development system, you want to assist your team in visualizing the flow of work, identifying impediments quickly, and managing flow by adjusting work-in-process limits. Which of the following tools can aid you in achieving these objectives?
Sprint retrospective
Kanban board
Product backlog
Sprint Review meeting
Sprint retrospectiveCorrect answerKanban boardProduct backlogSprint Review meetingOverall explanationA Kanban board provides a means to visualize the flow of work, make impediments easily visible, and allow flow to be managed by adjusting the work-in-process limits. Agile Practice Guide, Page 31
Question 10:
You are assigned to a new project that involves disruptive technologies. The PMO requested that you use the Agile approach to manage this project. Why?
Agile techniques and approaches effectively manage disruptive technologies, scope changes, and project risk.
Agile techniques and approaches effectively manage project risk.
Agile techniques and approaches effectively manage construction technologies.
Agile techniques and approaches effectively manage scope changes.
Correct answerAgile techniques and approaches effectively manage disruptive technologies, scope changes, and project risk.Agile techniques and approaches effectively manage project risk.Agile techniques and approaches effectively manage construction technologies.Agile techniques and approaches effectively manage scope changes.Overall explanationAgile techniques and approaches effectively manage disruptive technologies, scope changes, and project risk. Agile Practice Guide, Page 2.
Question 11:
Your company is transitioning from a traditional approach to agile. The relevant organizational personnel lack experience with agile methodologies. The organization has elected to use hybrid life cycles as a transition strategy. What else should be done to facilitate the transition?
Replace the existing project manager with an experienced external agile coach
Eliminate the project manager role entirely as agile teams are self-managing
Establish a directive project management office (PMO) to lead the transition
Contract an external agile coach to assist the organization with the transition
Replace the existing project manager with an experienced external agile coachEliminate the project manager role entirely as agile teams are self-managingEstablish a directive project management office (PMO) to lead the transitionCorrect answerContract an external agile coach to assist the organization with the transitionOverall explanationAn external agile coach can bring significant experience in agile best practices to assist the project team with the transition until internal resources are able to take over the responsibility.
Question 12:
Which of the following is not a value of the Agile manifesto?
Processes over people
Working software over comprehensive documentation
Customer collaboration over contract negotiation
Individuals and interactions over processes and tools
Correct answerProcesses over peopleWorking software over comprehensive documentationCustomer collaboration over contract negotiationIndividuals and interactions over processes and toolsOverall explanationThe four values of the Agile manifesto are: individuals and interactions over processes and tools, Working software over comprehensive documentation, customer collaboration over contract negotiation, and responding to change over following a plan. Agile Practice Guide, Page 8
Question 13:
Establishing a change control process is essential in both Agile and traditional project management approaches. In Agile projects, who holds the responsibility for approving changes?
Product owner
End users
Agile team
Scrum master
Correct answerProduct ownerEnd usersAgile teamScrum masterOverall explanationProduct owners have the ultimate responsibility for the project’s success. They prioritize the project backlog and authorize change requests on an Agile project. Agile Practice Guide, Page 41
Question 14:
A project manager is working with his team to develop a new software application. Due to earlier failures in similar applications, the rapid feedback from the customer on the suitability of the deliverables is very important. What is the best approach that should be selected?
Predictive
Waterfall
Adaptive
Traditional
PredictiveWaterfallCorrect answerAdaptiveTraditionalOverall explanationThe adaptive approach promotes the work to be undertaken in short cycles so that the results can be reviewed early and adapted as necessary. PMBOK Guide 6, Pages 19, 131.
Question 15:
In Agile methodology, customer satisfaction is of utmost importance. To ensure that the customer’s needs are understood and addressed, a designated individual is identified as the voice of the customer. This person represents the customer’s interests and provides feedback on the product during development. Who is typically known as the voice of the customer in an Agile approach?
Product Owner
Sponsor
Development team
Scrum Master
Correct answerProduct OwnerSponsor Development teamScrum MasterOverall explanationThe product owner must understand the needs and priorities of the stakeholders, including customers and users, this role is commonly referred to as the “Voice of the Customer.” Agile Practice Guide, Page 41.
Question 16:
Your company was recently awarded a large software project by a government agency, and the sprint began two days ago. However, the team has not reached an agreement on how to address one of the software features. As the project manager, what steps should you take to resolve this issue?
Ask the product owner, who is the key stakeholder, to choose among the different ideas.
Propose ideas to the group, ask everyone to vote, and then choose the most popular idea.
Schedule a session to give everyone the chance to express their opinions about each idea, then vote and decide.
Offer an opinion about the pros and cons of each idea and try to reach a consensus in a facilitated meeting.
Correct answerAsk the product owner, who is the key stakeholder, to choose among the different ideas.Propose ideas to the group, ask everyone to vote, and then choose the most popular idea.Schedule a session to give everyone the chance to express their opinions about each idea, then vote and decide.Offer an opinion about the pros and cons of each idea and try to reach a consensus in a facilitated meeting.Overall explanationThe Product Owner has to convey a clear vision of the project and prioritize the product backlog, ensure the development team understands tasks and works on the right features in the prioritized order, provide feedback and sign off on work results. So the project manager (servant leader/scrum master) should ask the product owner, who is the key stakeholder, to choose among the different ideas. Agile Practice Guide, Page 41.
Question 17:
You have been hired as a project manager in an organization that recently transitioned to Agile practices. During your first week on the job, you have noticed that your team has not fully embraced Agile principles. What should you do to help your team transition to Agile successfully?
Act as an Agile coach.
Ask the customer for more time.
Negotiate for better-qualified team members.
Escalate the matter to product owner.
Correct answerAct as an Agile coach.Ask the customer for more time.Negotiate for better-qualified team members.Escalate the matter to product owner.Overall explanationIn an Agile project, project managers shift from being the center of attention to serving the team and management. This means adopting a servant leadership approach, where the focus is on coaching team members, fostering collaboration, and aligning stakeholder needs. Agile Practice Guide, Page 38.
Question 18:
Freddy is working as a Scrum Master for a CRM development project. A stakeholder requested Freddy to submit the latest weekly status report showing the completed and remaining work in the project. Instead of submitting the report, Freddy took the stakeholder to the team’s wall, where a few pertinent updates are posted continuously. To address the stakeholder query, Freddy specifically points out:
Kanban board
Sprint backlog
Burndown chart
Velocity trend
Kanban boardSprint backlogCorrect answerBurndown chartVelocity trendOverall explanationA burndown chart shows the amount of work that has been completed in a sprint and the total work remaining. It is to see where the project is going over time. Agile Practice Guide, Page 62.
Question 19:
How often should retrospective meetings be held?
Whenever the Development Team considers it necessary
At the end of each Sprint
At the end of the project
Daily
Whenever the Development Team considers it necessaryCorrect answerAt the end of each SprintAt the end of the projectDailyOverall explanationA Retrospective is a regularly occurring workshop in which participants explore their work and results in order to improve both process and product. Many teams use iterations—especially 2-week iterations—because the iteration prompts a demonstration and a retrospective at the end. However, the team does not need iterations in order to retrospect. Team members may decide to retrospect at these key times: When the team completes a release or ships something, it does not have to be a monumental increment. It can be any release, no matter how small. When more than a few weeks have passed since the previous retrospective, When the team appears to be stuck and completed work is not flowing through the team, when the team reaches any other milestone. Agile Practice Guide, Page 51
Question 20:
You are working on an Agile project. The project sponsor informed you that an executive would like an update on the project’s progress. As a Scrum Master, what should you do?
Reach out to the project management office PMO for status report templates and provide project updates in that format.
Provide a link to the project shared drive for the executive to search through for any artifacts that are of interest.
Invite the executive to the project meeting space to determine if the project information radiators meet their needs.
Ask the project sponsor or product owner to provide an update since the project lead should be trying to keep the team free from impediments.
Reach out to the project management office PMO for status report templates and provide project updates in that format.Provide a link to the project shared drive for the executive to search through for any artifacts that are of interest.Correct answerInvite the executive to the project meeting space to determine if the project information radiators meet their needs.Ask the project sponsor or product owner to provide an update since the project lead should be trying to keep the team free from impediments.Overall explanationAn information radiator is a visible, physical display that provides information to the rest of the organization, enabling up-to-the-minute knowledge sharing without having to disturb the team. It is openly shared with all team members and other stakeholders and is continuously updated. It includes information such as the Kanban or task board, the team velocity, continuous integration status, the progress of the team, and Sprint Burndown Charts. The scrum master should invite the executive to the project meeting space to determine if the project information radiators meet their needs. Agile Practice Guide, Page 152.
Question 21:
The project manager has analyzed the team’s performance data and determined that the team velocity has been consistent at 30 story points for each of the first five sprints, with a schedule performance index (SPI) of 0.83 over the same period. How should the project manager respond to the team’s performance?
Crash the schedule in order to get productivity back on track
Suggest that the team set more realistic goals during sprint planning
Assign the team 20 story points for each sprint going forward
Submit a change request to revise the project schedule baseline
Crash the schedule in order to get productivity back on trackCorrect answerSuggest that the team set more realistic goals during sprint planningAssign the team 20 story points for each sprint going forwardSubmit a change request to revise the project schedule baselineOverall explanationSince the SPI (Completed Features/Planned Features) is less than 1, it seems as if the team over-committed by planning 30 story points per sprint at a time when they can only complete 25. As a project manager, it is essential to take action to address these issues. This could involve working collaboratively with the team to identify and address any obstacles or impediments that are slowing down progress, providing additional training or resources to improve efficiency, or re-evaluating the team’s capacity and workload to ensure that it is realistic and achievable. The project manager should also communicate the findings to stakeholders and take steps to manage their expectations, such as adjusting the project timeline or scope if necessary. Ultimately, the project manager should work closely with the team to ensure that they have the support and resources they need to deliver high-quality products on time and within budget. Agile Practice Guide, Page 69.
Question 22:
As a new member of a software development team, you were informed that the organization has recently adopted Agile practices for project management. During your orientation, a chart was shown to you that depicted Agile and Kanban as subsets of Lean. What are your thoughts on this chart?
The chart is correct because Agile and Kanban are subsets of Lean because they are named instances of Lean thinking.
The chart is wrong because Agile, Kanban, and Lean are three different approaches to project management.
The chart is wrong because Kanban is a subset of Lean while Agile is not.
The chart is wrong because Agile is a subset of Lean while Kanban is not.
Correct answerThe chart is correct because Agile and Kanban are subsets of Lean because they are named instances of Lean thinking.The chart is wrong because Agile, Kanban, and Lean are three different approaches to project management.The chart is wrong because Kanban is a subset of Lean while Agile is not.The chart is wrong because Agile is a subset of Lean while Kanban is not.Overall explanationAgile and Kanban are subsets of Lean because they are named instances of Lean thinking that share Lean concepts such as focus on value, small batch sizes, and elimination of waste. Agile Practice Guide, Page 11.
Question 23:
Which of the following options best describes the Sprint Review?
A meeting for the Development Team to review its processes during the Sprint.
A meeting to give clients and other interested parties an opportunity to inspect and review the work done in the Sprint and give feedback.
A meeting in which the Product Owner revises the Development Team activities during the Sprint.
A meeting used to build up team spirit.
A meeting for the Development Team to review its processes during the Sprint.Correct answerA meeting to give clients and other interested parties an opportunity to inspect and review the work done in the Sprint and give feedback.A meeting in which the Product Owner revises the Development Team activities during the Sprint.A meeting used to build up team spirit.Overall explanationA review at the end of each iteration with the product owner and other customer stakeholders to review the progress of the product, get early feedback, and have the product owner review and accept the stories delivered in that iteration. Agile Practice Guide, Page 55.
Question 24:
During the sprint planning meeting, it was clear that the amount of work necessary to fulfill the product owner’s requested items was greater than the development team’s capacity. Which action should be taken during the Sprint planning meeting to overcome this concern?
Increasing the number of Sprints.
The Development Team and Product Owner collaborate, with a view to remove or modify items.
Cancel the Sprint.
The Product Owner demands that the Development Team work overtime just for this Sprint, provided this doesn’t happen again.
Increasing the number of Sprints.Correct answerThe Development Team and Product Owner collaborate, with a view to remove or modify items.Cancel the Sprint.The Product Owner demands that the Development Team work overtime just for this Sprint, provided this doesn’t happen again.Overall explanationThe Development team and product owner collaborate, with a view to removing or modifying items. Agile Practice Guide, Page 55
Question 25:
Your team is working on an Agile project for the first time, and you are approaching the end of the first iteration. However, some of the user stories that were assigned for this iteration are not yet completed. Can the team extend the duration of the iteration by a week to finish all the remaining user stories in the iteration plan?
Yes, but requires the approval of the Scrum Master.
No, the iterations are time-boxed and can’t be extended.
Yes, but requires the approval of the product owner.
Yes, but the extension cannot be more than 2 days.
Yes, but requires the approval of the Scrum Master.Correct answerNo, the iterations are time-boxed and can’t be extended.Yes, but requires the approval of the product owner.Yes, but the extension cannot be more than 2 days.Overall explanationIteration durations are time-boxed and cannot be extended. All incomplete stories need to be returned to the product backlog where they will be re-prioritized along with the other stories in the backlog. Agile Practice Guide, Page 25.
Question 26:
You are working on a big and complex project. Multiple teams with several team members need to work concurrently to achieve the project objectives. Which of the following approaches is recommended for your project?
Kanban
Scrum of Scrums
Extreme Programming
Scrum
KanbanCorrect answerScrum of ScrumsExtreme ProgrammingScrumOverall explanationScrum of Scrums is a technique used when two or more Scrum teams, consisting of three to nine members each, need to coordinate their work instead of one large Scrum team. Agile Practice Guide, Page 111
Question 27:
One of your customers contracted you to develop a new device. You insisted that the contract thoroughly capture the device specifications. The customer does not have clear requirements upfront and, therefore, requested that you develop the device using Agile. You delivered the new device as per the contract, but the customer is not satisfied with the outcome. Which Agile Manifesto value was most likely not appropriately applied by you?
Customer collaboration over contract negotiations
Individuals and interactions over processes and tools
Business people and developers must work together
Pair programming over continuous integration
Correct answerCustomer collaboration over contract negotiationsIndividuals and interactions over processes and toolsBusiness people and developers must work togetherPair programming over continuous integrationOverall explanationThoroughly negotiating contracts is typical for projects that are led using the traditional approach. In this scenario, however, the customer does not have detailed requirements upfront and requests that the vendor develop the device using agile methods. Collaboration over negotiations would be more beneficial for both parties. Agile Practice Guide, Page 8
Question 28:
What method guides the utilization of a product backlog, sprint planning, and sprint retrospective sessions?
Sprint
Kanban
Programming (XP)
Scrum
SprintKanbanProgramming (XP)Correct answerScrumOverall explanationThe scrum method provides guidance on the use of a product backlog, a product owner, a scrum master, and a cross-functional development team, including sprint planning, daily scrum, sprint review, and sprint retrospective sessions. Agile Practice Guide, Page 31
Question 29:
Your team is working on developing a final product for your customer. The customer is anxious to get a prototype released on the market to get end-users’ feedback and impressions before the entire product is finished. What must the project team establish for their release to end-users?
The minimal viable product
Velocity
The sprint cycle
Transition plan
Correct answerThe minimal viable productVelocityThe sprint cycleTransition planOverall explanation(Minimum Viable Product): the smallest collection of features that can be included in a product for customers to consider it functional. Agile Practice Guide, Page 23.
Question 30:
You are working on a software development project following an Agile approach. How should the work be allocated to the team?
Team members should self-select tasks appropriate to their skills
Tasks should be randomly allocated to team members.
The Scrum Master should allocate specific tasks to individuals
The most complex tasks should be allocated to the Scrum Master.
Correct answerTeam members should self-select tasks appropriate to their skillsTasks should be randomly allocated to team members.The Scrum Master should allocate specific tasks to individualsThe most complex tasks should be allocated to the Scrum Master.Overall explanationIn Agile projects, team members should self-select tasks appropriate to their skills. Agile Practice Guide, Page 39.
Question 31:
Which of the following is not considered a servant-leadership skill?
Impediment removal
Facilitation
Backlog grooming
Coaching
Impediment removalFacilitationCorrect answerBacklog groomingCoachingOverall explanationServant-leadership skills include facilitation, coaching, and impediment removal. Backlog grooming is usually associated with product owners. Agile Practice Guide, Page 41
Question 32:
Which of the following is a major challenge faced by an organization that is just beginning to use Agile approaches?
Avoidance of multi-tasking introduces inefficiency.
Daily standups could be viewed as time-intensive activities.
Decomposing work into iterative prototypes involves rework that could be viewed negatively
Agile approaches could be viewed as plan-driven.
Avoidance of multi-tasking introduces inefficiency.Daily standups could be viewed as time-intensive activities.Correct answerDecomposing work into iterative prototypes involves rework that could be viewed negativelyAgile approaches could be viewed as plan-driven.Overall explanationOrganizations just beginning to use agile approaches also experience high degrees of change. Higher degrees of collaboration may require more frequent handoffs between teams, departments, or vendors. Decomposing work into iterative prototypes involves rework that could be viewed negatively. Agile Practice Guide, Page 73
Question 33:
What is the purpose of the daily scrum (daily meeting)?
Reporting work progress to the Scrum Master.
Review progress from the previous day and highlight any obstacles encountered or anticipated.
Technical discussions and adjustments in the Development Team work.
Reporting work progress to the project client.
Reporting work progress to the Scrum Master.Correct answerReview progress from the previous day and highlight any obstacles encountered or anticipated.Technical discussions and adjustments in the Development Team work.Reporting work progress to the project client.Overall explanationA Daily Scrum is a brief daily collaboration meeting in which the team reviews progress from the previous day, declares intentions for the current day, and highlights any obstacles encountered or anticipated. It is also known as “daily standup.” Agile Practice Guide, Page 151
Question 34:
Collaboration between the product owner and the Agile team is a key factor in ensuring success in an Agile project. Which of the following Agile techniques can facilitate this collaboration?
Kanban boards
Backlog preparation and refinement
Retrospectives
Daily standups
Kanban boardsCorrect answerBacklog preparation and refinementRetrospectivesDaily standupsOverall explanationBacklog preparation and refinement are the activities where the business (product owner) and the developers (Agile team) work together to define and prioritize project objectives. Agile Practice Guide, Page 98
Question 35:
In a Scrum project, who is primarily responsible for tracking project impediments?
Developer
Scrum Master
Development team
Functional Manager
DeveloperCorrect answerScrum MasterDevelopment teamFunctional ManagerOverall explanationThe scrum master is responsible for ensuring the Scrum process is upheld and works to ensure the Scrum team adheres to the practices and rules as well as coaches the team on removing impediments. Agile Practice Guide, Page 101
Question 36:
In the Scrum framework, what is the responsibility of the product owner?
Coaches the team on removing impediments
Ensure the Scrum team adheres to the practices and rules
Deliver working product
Maximizing the value of the product.
Coaches the team on removing impedimentsEnsure the Scrum team adheres to the practices and rulesDeliver working productCorrect answerMaximizing the value of the product.Overall explanationThe Scrum team consists of a product owner, a development team, and a scrum master. The product owner is responsible for maximizing the value of the product. Agile Practice Guide, Page 101
Question 37:
Given the business value in units and development effort in weeks for each of the following project features: Feature A (15 units, 5 weeks), Feature B (10 units, 4 weeks), Feature C (9 units, 9 weeks), and Feature D (6 units, 6 weeks). Which feature should the team prioritize first?
A
B
D
C
Correct answerABDCOverall explanationThe Value vs. Effort Model is one of the techniques used to prioritize feature development and produce the product roadmap. The feature that delivers the highest value with the least effort will be the top priority for the product backlog. For example, Feature A = 15/5 = 3, Feature B = 10/4 = 2.5, Feature C = 9/9 = 1, and Feature D = 6/6 = 1. Therefore, the team should prioritize features that offer high value with low effort. Agile Practice Guide, Page 52.
Question 38:
Which of the following helps the team improve its effectiveness by visualizing the flow of work, making impediments easily visible, and allowing flow to be managed by adjusting work within process limits?
Burndown chart
Burnup chart
Kanban Board
Product Backlog
Burndown chartBurnup chartCorrect answerKanban BoardProduct BacklogOverall explanationA Kanban board helps the team to further improve its effectiveness by visualizing the flow of work, making impediments easily visible, and allowing flow to be managed by adjusting work within process limits. Agile Practice Guide, Page 31
Question 39:
Which of the following is NOT an artifact of the Scrum framework?
Sprint backlog
Increments
Issue log
Product backlog
Sprint backlogIncrementsCorrect answerIssue logProduct backlogOverall explanationA product backlog, a sprint backlog, and increments are typical artifacts of the Scrum framework. Agile Practice Guide, Page 101
Question 40:
A new team member with a traditional project background has joined your Agile team. During a discussion about project success metrics, the team member asked about the key performance indicators (KPIs) that predict project success in Agile. You informed the team member that in Agile projects, progress and success are measured by:
Demonstrating that a working product has been delivered to the customer.
Traditional KPIs and measures.
Maintaining a productive team velocity.
Releasing on time.
Correct answerDemonstrating that a working product has been delivered to the customer.Traditional KPIs and measures.Maintaining a productive team velocity.Releasing on time.Overall explanationFor Agile projects, the working product is the primary measure of progress. Agile Practice Guide, Page 9
Question 41:
What project life cycle should be proposed for a project with a high degree of change and a high frequency of delivery?
Incremental
Waterfall
Iterative
Agile
IncrementalWaterfallIterativeCorrect answerAgileOverall explanationThe Agile approach is recommended for projects that require a high degree of change and a high frequency of project deliveries. Agile Practice Guide, Page 19.
Question 42:
Your organization has been using the waterfall approach for all projects so far. However, the project manager wants to try the Agile approach for new projects. The team members are not experienced in Agile methodologies. What should be your first step?
Train the team members in effectively using the Scrum methodology
Train the team members in effectively using the XP approach
Train the team members in the fundamentals of the Agile Mindset and principles
Train the team members in effectively using the Kanban approach
Train the team members in effectively using the Scrum methodologyTrain the team members in effectively using the XP approachCorrect answerTrain the team members in the fundamentals of the Agile Mindset and principlesTrain the team members in effectively using the Kanban approachOverall explanationConsider starting by training team members in the fundamentals of the Agile Mindset and principles. If the team decides to use a specific approach such as Scrum or Kanban, provide a workshop on that approach so that team members can learn how to use it. Agile Practice Guide, Page 32.
Question 43:
Which of the following is considered a value of the Agile Manifesto? (Select two)
Individuals and interactions over processes and tools
Customer collaboration over comprehensive documentation
Responding to change over following a plan
Working software over contract negotiation
Responding to change over comprehensive documentation
Correct selectionIndividuals and interactions over processes and toolsCustomer collaboration over comprehensive documentationCorrect selectionResponding to change over following a planWorking software over contract negotiationResponding to change over comprehensive documentationOverall explanationThe four values of the Agile Manifesto are: individuals and interactions over processes and tools, working software over comprehensive documentation, customer collaboration over contract negotiation, and responding to change over following a plan. Agile Practice Guide, Page 8
Question 44:
In the Scrum framework, what is the sprint duration?
5 weeks
6 weeks
Up to 8 weeks
1 month or less
5 weeks 6 weeksUp to 8 weeksCorrect answer1 month or lessOverall explanationIn Scrum, the development process is divided into consistent time boxes called sprints, which are one month or less in duration, during which time a potentially releasable increment of the product is produced. Agile Practice Guide, Page 101.
Question 45:
As an Agile leader, you have been assigned the responsibility of introducing Agile methodologies to an organization that has previously used predictive life cycles to manage all its projects. To ensure a successful transition, it is crucial to develop a clear transition strategy that considers the unique needs and challenges of the organization. Which of the following is an advisable transition strategy?
Trying the new techniques on completed projects.
Trying the new techniques on a less risky project.
Trying the new techniques on high-value projects.
Trying the new techniques on ongoing projects.
Trying the new techniques on completed projects.Correct answerTrying the new techniques on a less risky project.Trying the new techniques on high-value projects.Trying the new techniques on ongoing projects.Overall explanationOne advisable transition strategy is to start with a pilot project or a small team and gradually introduce Agile methodologies while still incorporating some elements of the predictive approach. This approach can help to manage the transition process and minimize disruption to ongoing projects. Other strategies could include providing training and support for team members to develop Agile skills and knowledge, identifying and addressing any organizational barriers to Agile adoption, and establishing metrics and feedback mechanisms to track progress and identify areas for improvement. Ultimately, the success of the transition will depend on the organization’s commitment to Agile principles and the ability to adapt to changing requirements and feedback. Trying the new techniques on a small project with a medium to a low degree of uncertainty is advisable. The lower the risk, the greater the chances of success. You need some quick wins to help smooth the transition to the new approaches. Agile Practice Guide, Page 30.
Question 46:
Transitioning from a predictive to an Agile approach can be a significant change for an organization. To facilitate this change, it is important to develop a clear strategy and plan for implementation. Which of the following strategies will help the organization with this change?
Take a big bang approach of moving the whole organization to agile at once.
Assign multiple managers who will be accountable for the agile approach.
Improve organizational readiness to change by addressing impediments and agile in the organization.
Create a task force of executives who will monitor agile projects on a daily basis.
Take a big bang approach of moving the whole organization to agile at once.Assign multiple managers who will be accountable for the agile approach.Correct answerImprove organizational readiness to change by addressing impediments and agile in the organization.Create a task force of executives who will monitor agile projects on a daily basis.Overall explanationTransitioning from a predictive to an Agile approach can be a significant change for an organization. To facilitate this change, it is important to develop a clear strategy and plan for implementation. One strategy that can help with this change is to adopt a phased approach, gradually introducing Agile methodologies while still maintaining some elements of the predictive approach. This approach can help to manage the transition process and minimize disruption to ongoing projects. Other strategies could include providing training and support for team members to develop Agile skills and knowledge, identifying and addressing any organizational barriers to Agile adoption, and establishing metrics and feedback mechanisms to track progress and identify areas for improvement. Ultimately, the success of the transition will depend on the organization’s commitment to Agile principles and its ability to adapt to changing requirements and feedback. Agile Practice Guide, Page 80.
Question 47:
You and your team members agree that face-to-face conversations are the most efficient and effective way to convey information within your development team. Which of the following Agile techniques can help facilitate this method of communication?
Backlog refinement
Daily standups
Team composition
Backlog preparation
Backlog refinementCorrect answerDaily standupsTeam compositionBacklog preparationOverall explanationDaily standups require colocated team members to meet face-to-face, share progress, and make team commitments. Agile Practice Guide, Page 98.
Question 48:
In a Scrum project, once items in the product backlog have been selected for development in the sprint, who is responsible for determining how the development team should carry out the work?
The Scrum Master
The functional manager
The Product Owner
The Development Team
The Scrum MasterThe functional managerThe Product OwnerCorrect answerThe Development TeamOverall explanationThe development team is a responsible, self-organized team, facilitated by the Scrum Master. The development team should determine how the work should be done. Agile Practice Guide, Page 39
Question 49:
Which of the following represents the core values of eXtreme Programming?
Communication, simplicity, feedback, courage, and respect.
Unity, faith, agility, and discipline.
Planning, executing, monitoring, and controlling.
Collaboration, complexity, communication, faith, and discipline.
Correct answerCommunication, simplicity, feedback, courage, and respect.Unity, faith, agility, and discipline.Planning, executing, monitoring, and controlling.Collaboration, complexity, communication, faith, and discipline.Overall explanationEXtreme Programming’s core values are communication, simplicity, feedback, courage, and respect. Agile Practice Guide, Page 102.
Question 50:
Agile practices, tools, and techniques are geared towards projects operating in environments that:
Involve project work that heavily is driven by industry standards.
Require upfront collection and definition of the bulk of the requirements.
Control changes through a change request process
Have high rates of change, complexity, and risk.
Involve project work that heavily is driven by industry standards.Require upfront collection and definition of the bulk of the requirements.Control changes through a change request processCorrect answerHave high rates of change, complexity, and risk.Overall explanationHigh-uncertainty projects have high rates of change, complexity, and risk. These characteristics can present problems for traditional predictive approaches that aim to determine the bulk of the requirements upfront and control changes through a change request process. Instead, agile approaches were created to explore feasibility in short cycles and quickly adapt based on evaluation and feedback. Agile Practice Guide, Page 7.
Question 1:
Mark is the project manager of the Primary Disposals Project and will be contracting to buy a lock-up shed to hold plant and machinery for the duration of the project. Which type of contract represents the least risk for Mark’s project?
Cost plus percentage of costs
Cost plus fixed fee
Cost plus incentive fee
Firm Fixed price
Cost plus percentage of costsCost plus fixed feeCost plus incentive feeCorrect answerFirm Fixed priceOverall explanationExplanation: Answer = Firm fixed price - this contract present the least risk for the buyer.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 2:
Which of the following Manage Quality techniques examines problems, constraints, and non-value-added activities during project work?
Reserve Analysis
Expected monetary value analysis
Process Analysis
Earned Value Analysis
Reserve AnalysisExpected monetary value analysisCorrect answerProcess AnalysisEarned Value AnalysisOverall explanationProcess Analysis examines problems, constraints, and non-value added activities that occur during project work. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 292.DomainProject Quality Management
Question 3:
A project manager is in the process of estimating activity durations for his project. Which of the following is the best to help the project manager to estimate duration?
HR manager
Subject matter expert (SME)
Project sponsor
All Stakeholders
HR managerCorrect answerSubject matter expert (SME)Project sponsorAll StakeholdersOverall explanationSME is part of EXPERT JUDGMENT. Expert Judgment is a Tool and Technique used in the Estimate Activity Duration Process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 200.DomainProject Schedule Management
Question 4:
During project execution, a high-performing team member left the company. Following this loss, a quality audit was conducted, which indicated that the work product’s quality standards were unmet. What should the project manager do next?
Consult the resource management plan.
Create a cause and effect diagram.
Perform a reserve analysis of the work performance.
Crash the schedule.
Consult the resource management plan.Correct answerCreate a cause and effect diagram.Perform a reserve analysis of the work performance.Crash the schedule.Overall explanationKeyword ( Following this loss ) may be the issue not only related to the loss of the team member. Since the work product’s quality standards are unmet , the project manager should FIRST Create a cause and effect diagram to identify the main or root cause of the problem.DomainProject Quality Management
Question 5:
You and your team have compiled your project’s activity list, have determined how the activities should be performed and analyzed the schedule. You are preparing information for the project sponsor to highlight the identified activities that may create a delay in the overall project schedule. Which of the following would be most useful in this situation?
Activity attributes
Duration estimates
Project calendars
Project schedule network diagrams
Activity attributesDuration estimatesProject calendarsCorrect answerProject schedule network diagramsOverall explanationIn this question, project network diagrams would best serve to provide information concerning activities that would possibly create schedule delays. A project network diagram is one of three suggested project schedule models. At a minimum, a project schedule should include planned start dates and planned finished dates for each activity. Network diagrams which include activity date information and critical path activities, display how those activities logically relate to other activities and the overall project timeline. A detailed network diagram that includes critical path activities, durations, milestones, and resources could be useful in this situation to highlight the activities that may create a delay in the overall project schedule. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 164]DomainProject Schedule Management
Question 6:
You are a project manager, and you have finished the make or buy analysis and bidder conference & applied source selection criteria for your sellers. What should you do next?
Selected sellers
Sign contract
Procurement negotiation
Close contract
Correct answerSelected sellersSign contractProcurement negotiationClose contractOverall explanationSelect sellers is the next step after finished make or buy analysis and bidder conference & applied source selection criteria for the seller.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 7:
A Project Manager is in the process of preparing a plan that documents how the procurement process will be managed: from developing procurement documents to contract closure. She is also going through project requirements and scope documents with the team and discussing different contract types to decide the one most suitable for the project. According to you, which process of procurement management is the Project Manager in?
Conduct Procurements
Plan Procurement Management
Control Procurements
Close Procurements
Conduct ProcurementsCorrect answerPlan Procurement ManagementControl ProcurementsClose ProcurementsOverall explanationThe Project Manager is in the ‘plan procurement management’ process, and she is preparing the procurement management plan with her team. Contract types are also important tools of this process, which is carried at the planning stage of the project. [PMBOK Guide 6, Page 466]DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 8:
A project scope statement is defined with project deliverables, constraints, and assumptions associated with the project objectives. What should the project manager do next?
Determine the products, services and for results to be delivered.
Take a formal acceptance of the completed project deliverables.
Monitoring the status of the project and product scope and managing changes to the scope baseline.
Establish a hierarchical breakdown of the total scope to be carried out by the project team
Determine the products, services and for results to be delivered.Take a formal acceptance of the completed project deliverables.Monitoring the status of the project and product scope and managing changes to the scope baseline.Correct answerEstablish a hierarchical breakdown of the total scope to be carried out by the project teamOverall explanationA project scope statement is defined = Define scope process is completed so the next process is Create WBS process. Create wbs is the process of Establish a hierarchical breakdown of the total scope to be carried out by the project team to comply with the project objectives. [PMBOK 6, Page 157]DomainProject Scope Management
Question 9:
You, as a project manager, are in the process of midway review at the end of the first year of a $50K project. The earned value analysis shows that the PV is $25K, the EV is $20K, and the AC is $30K. What can be determined from these figures?
The project is going slower than planned.
The project is going normally, and it will be managed and closed normally.
The project is under budget but ahead of schedule.
The project should be terminated as there is no solution to fix it.
Correct answerThe project is going slower than planned.The project is going normally, and it will be managed and closed normally.The project is under budget but ahead of schedule.The project should be terminated as there is no solution to fix it.Overall explanationEV < AC & PV so the Project is going slower than planned = Over Budget and Behind Schedule.DomainProject Cost Management
Question 10:
A project manager joins a new project for an organization that does not have a lessons learned repository. How should the project manager establish the project baseline?
Develop a business case to document project objectives.
Ask stakeholders to provide their recommendations for the project.
Identify and map the benefits and outcomes of the project.
Perform a data-gathering analysis and review the organizational process Assets
Develop a business case to document project objectives.Ask stakeholders to provide their recommendations for the project.Identify and map the benefits and outcomes of the project.Correct answerPerform a data-gathering analysis and review the organizational process AssetsOverall explanationSince he is a new project manager, he should perform a data-gathering analysis and review the organizational process Assets to establish the project baseline.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 11:
You are in the process of finalizing all activities for the project, phase, or contract. Which of the following documents include information about Objectives of Scope, Quality, Cost, and the criteria used to evaluate them?
Project Charter
Risk Register
Final Report
Scope Management Plan
Project CharterRisk RegisterCorrect answerFinal ReportScope Management PlanOverall explanationFinal Report includes information about Objectives of Scope, Quality and Cost and the criteria used to evaluate them. PMBOK Guide 6,, Page 127.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 12:
A project manager is leading the construction of a new office building. Which of the following activities might the project manager and the team conduct during the Monitor and Control Project Work process?
Prepare and share the final project report according to the communications management plan
Transfer the ownership of deliverables to the assigned stakeholders
Comparing actual project performance against the project management plan
Implementing approved change requests to achieve the project’s objectives
Prepare and share the final project report according to the communications management planTransfer the ownership of deliverables to the assigned stakeholdersCorrect answerComparing actual project performance against the project management planImplementing approved change requests to achieve the project’s objectivesOverall explanationMonitor and Control Project Work is the process of tracking, reviewing, and reporting overall progress to meet the performance objectives defined in the project management plan. Of the available choices, only comparing actual project performance against the project management plan is performed during the Monitor and Control Project Work process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 107.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 13:
In which of the following types of contracts does the buyer have the MAXIMUM cost risk?
Fixed Price
Time and Material
Cost Reimbursable
Cost Plus Incentive Fee
Fixed PriceTime and MaterialCorrect answerCost ReimbursableCost Plus Incentive FeeOverall explanationIn a cost-reimbursable type of contract, the buyer has the maximum risk because the total cost of the project remains unknown. This is usually used when the buyer is not able to come up with a complete contract statement of work and has limited understanding. cost-plus fixed fee is the maximum cost risk for the buyer and included in cost reimbursable contract. In a Fixed Price Contract, the buyer has the least cost risk because any additional cost over and above the negotiated price has to be borne by the seller.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 14:
As a project manager, you are in the process of confirming the formal acceptance of the seller’s work, finalizing open claims, Updating records to reflect final results, and archiving lessons learned recently captured about the seller’s performance. Which of the following processes are you performing?
Close Project or Phase
Control Procurements
Conduct Procurements
Monitor and Control Project Work
Correct answerClose Project or PhaseControl ProcurementsConduct ProcurementsMonitor and Control Project WorkOverall explanationThe scenario presented describes administrative closure activities, which occur as part of the Close Project or Phase process. While procurements are closed through the Control Procurements process, administrative closure of procurements occurs through the Close Project or Phase process. Activities related to the completion of the contractual agreements applicable to the project or project phase such as: ** Confirming the formal acceptance of the seller’s work, ** Finalizing open claims, ** Updating records to reflect final results, and ** Archiving such information for future use. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 123]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 15:
You are appointed as a project manager for a project which involves more than 500 stakeholders. One of the Key stakeholders does not have authority regarding project decisions, but you recently discovered that he is interested in your project. What stakeholder management strategy should you use with the Key Stakeholder?
Manage the Key Stakeholder closely
Monitor the Key Stakeholder actions
Keep the Key Stakeholder informed
Keep the Key Stakeholder satisfied
Manage the Key Stakeholder closelyMonitor the Key Stakeholder actionsCorrect answerKeep the Key Stakeholder informedKeep the Key Stakeholder satisfiedOverall explanationA power/interest grid is a classification model used for stakeholder analysis and management that groups the stakeholders based on their level of authority (power) and their level of concern (interest) regarding project outcomes. The classification and recommended management strategies are as follows: Low-power/low-interest: monitor only Low-power/high-interest: keep informed High-power/low-interest: keep satisfied High-power/high-interest: manage closely Based on this scenario, the Key stakeholder can be classified as Low-power/high-interest; therefore, the correct answer is to keep the Key Stakeholder informed.DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 16:
During the planning stage of a project, a company goes under an organizational structure change. The project manager believes most of the stakeholders have changed. Which tool or technique should the project manager uses to verify whether the stakeholders have changed
Questionnaires and surveys.
Decision-making matrix.
Mind mapping.
Fishbone diagram.
Correct answerQuestionnaires and surveys.Decision-making matrix.Mind mapping.Fishbone diagram.Overall explanationQuestionnaires and surveys are a Data-gathering techniques that written sets of questions designed to quickly accumulate information from a large number of respondents. Questionnaires and/or surveys are most appropriate with varied audiences, when a quick turnaround is needed, when respondents are geographically dispersed, and where statistical analysis could be appropriate. So the project manager should uses Questionnaires and surveys to verify whether the stakeholders have changed.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 17:
A project manager is working on a project for which some requirements have not been clearly defined. The customer insists that this should not be considered a problem and the project should continue without delay. What should the project manager do?
Meet with the team to discuss the concerns.
Log the risk in the risk register.
Speak with the customer to avoid the risk.
Accept the risk and start project work.
Meet with the team to discuss the concerns.Correct answerLog the risk in the risk register.Speak with the customer to avoid the risk.Accept the risk and start project work.Overall explanationSome requirements have not been clearly defined , it’s a risk and the project manager should Log the risk in the risk register then analyze the impact on project objectives. The three other options will be done after updating risk register.DomainProject Risk Management
Question 18:
During a group activity to identify an input to the plan procurement management process, some participants disagree with the ranking of compliance-related items. What tool or technique should the project manager use to resolve this?
Brainstorming
Document analysis.
Nominal group technique.
Affinity diagram.
BrainstormingDocument analysis.Correct answerNominal group technique.Affinity diagram.Overall explanationKeyword ( ranking- disagree ) Requirements documentation is an input of the plan procurement management process. One of the tools in collect requirement process is Nominal group technique.. The nominal group technique enhances brainstorming with a voting process used to rank the most useful ideas for further brainstorming or for prioritization. The nominal group technique is a structured form of brainstorming consisting of four steps: ** A question or problem is posed to the group. Each person silently generates and writes down their ideas. ** The moderator writes down the ideas on a flip chart until all ideas are recorded. ** Each recorded idea is discussed until all group members have a clear understanding. ** Individuals vote privately to prioritize the ideas, usually using a scale of 1 to 5, with 1 being the lowest and 5 being the highest. Voting may take place in many rounds to reduce and focus in on ideas. After each round, the votes are tallied and the highest-scoring ideas are selected. PMBOK 6th edition page, 144DomainProject Scope Management
Question 19:
You have completed resource planning and acquired resources. You have improved the team competency and performance. Now, you wish to track the performance of individual members and optimize the team’s performance. Which process will you perform?
Develop Team
Team building
Manage Team
Control Resources
Develop TeamTeam buildingCorrect answerManage TeamControl ResourcesOverall explanationAll this is performed in the Manage Team process.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 20:
Your construction project is in the execution phase, and you have identified a new stakeholder with a high level of influence. As a project manager, what should you do?
Update the Stakeholder engagement plan.
Update the Stakeholder register.
Update the requirements traceability matrix.
Update the Project management plan.
Update the Stakeholder engagement plan.Correct answerUpdate the Stakeholder register.Update the requirements traceability matrix.Update the Project management plan.Overall explanationKeyword “ a new stakeholder “ the stakeholder should be identified first and Update Stakeholder Register. The above question very important and you will encounter in the real exam.DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 21:
After analyzing risk with the project team, the project manager decided to establish a contingency reserve to handle the threat if it occurs. What type of strategy is this?
Active acceptance
Passive transference
Active mitigation
Passive acceptance
Correct answerActive acceptancePassive transferenceActive mitigationPassive acceptanceOverall explanationThe most common active acceptance strategy is to establish a contingency reserve, including amounts of time, money, or resources to handle the threat if it occurs. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 443.DomainProject Risk Management
Question 22:
A project manager noticed an unusually high rate of risks but had limited resources to address all of them. To what should the project manager refer to determine risk priorities?
Risk probability and impact matrix.
Risk management plan.
Risk mitigation strategy.
Risk breakdown structure (RBS).
Correct answerRisk probability and impact matrix.Risk management plan.Risk mitigation strategy.Risk breakdown structure (RBS).Overall explanationA probability and impact matrix is a grid for mapping the probability of each risk occurrence and its impact on project objectives if that risk occurs. This matrix specifies combinations of probability and impact that allow individual project risks to be divided into priority groups (see Figure 11-5). Risks can be prioritized for further analysis and planning of risk responses based on their probability and impacts. The probability of occurrence for each individual project risk is assessed as well as its impact on one or more project objectives if it does occur, using definitions of probability and impact for the project as specified in the risk management plan. Individual project risks are assigned to a priority level based on the combination of their assessed probability and impact, using a probability and impact matrix. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 425.DomainProject Risk Management
Question 23:
You are a project manager managing a construction project. During project closure, you were not able to get the customer clearance through negotiations. What should the project manager do next?
Seek arbitration following the ADR procedures.
Unresolved claims may be subject to litigation.
Start the closing phase.
Inform project team members.
Correct answerSeek arbitration following the ADR procedures.Unresolved claims may be subject to litigation.Start the closing phase.Inform project team members.Overall explanationWhenever settlement cannot be achieved through direct negotiation, some form of alternative dispute resolution (ADR) including mediation or arbitration may be explored. When all else fails, litigation in the courts is the least desirable option. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 498]DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 24:
A project manager wants to establish benchmark for comparing actual project performance with the project management plan. What process should the project manager complete to generate this model?
Develop schedule
Create WBS
Develop project Charter
Sequence activities
Develop scheduleCorrect answerCreate WBSDevelop project CharterSequence activitiesOverall explanationCreate WBS process is the correct answer because the scope baseline is an output from this process and The scope baseline is compared to actual results to determine if a change, corrective action, or preventive action is necessary.SO will use as a benchmark for Comparison.DomainProject Scope Management
Question 25:
Marvin is so good at assembling those types of equipment that if someone with no experience is hired, it will take three years to match his skill. This type of knowledge is known as:
Experience knowledge
Explicit knowledge
Tacit knowledge
Embedded knowledge
Experience knowledgeExplicit knowledgeCorrect answerTacit knowledgeEmbedded knowledgeOverall explanationKnowledge is commonly split into explicit (knowledge that can be readily codified using words, pictures, and numbers) and tacit (knowledge that is personal and difficult to express, such as beliefs, insights, experience, and know-how). PMBOK Guide 6, Page 100.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 26:
You are managing a heavy equipment manufacturing project. During the implementation phase, an unforeseen issue occurred and need to procure a new piece of machinery. As a project manager, from where may the necessary funds be obtained?
Management reserve.
Contingency reserve.
Project sponsor.
Cost Baseline.
Correct answerManagement reserve.Contingency reserve.Project sponsor.Cost Baseline.Overall explanationKeyword (unforeseen issue) . Management reserves are an amount of the project budget withheld for management control purposes and are reserved for unforeseen work that is within scope of the project. Management reserves are intended to address the unknown unknowns that can affect a project. [PMBOK Guide 6, Page 252]DomainProject Cost Management
Question 27:
You have been assigned to an ongoing project. This project is about identifying the key market driver for your company’s financial product, and your project team told you that there are several problems with the stakeholders. To quickly assess the current situation, which of the following documents will be the FIRST one that you should check?
Communications Management Plan
Project Management Plan
Issue Log
Stakeholder Management Plan
Communications Management PlanProject Management PlanCorrect answerIssue LogStakeholder Management PlanOverall explanationAny project or stakeholder concerns are documented in the issue log, as well as any assigned action items associated with managing the issue. PMBOK 6th edition, Page 525DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 28:
One of the client employees asks the project manager for a new product feature. The project manager is unsure who have the authority to approve this request. To what document should the project manager refer?
Change Management Plan
Organizational process assets ( OPA )
Change Log
RACI Matrix
Correct answerChange Management PlanOrganizational process assets ( OPA )Change LogRACI MatrixOverall explanationKeyword (authority to approve the request) The change management plan provides the direction for managing the change control process and documents the roles and responsibilities of the change control board (CCB). RACI Matrix is used to illustrate the connections between work packages, or activities, and project team members. so the correct answer is change management plan. [PMBOK 6, Page 116]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 29:
The enterprise environmental factors play an important role during the development of the project charter. Enterprise Environmental Factors includes some elements such as:
Organizational standard policies, processes, and procedures
Templates (e.g., project charter template)
Historical information and lessons learned .
Organizational culture and political climate
Organizational standard policies, processes, and proceduresTemplates (e.g., project charter template)Historical information and lessons learned .Correct answerOrganizational culture and political climateOverall explanationOrganizational culture, and political climate is examples of (EEF). [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 78]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 30:
Which of the following techniques should a project manager use to optimize and reduce the duration of a project?
Resource levelling.
Fast tracking.
Critical path method.
Simulation
Resource levelling.Correct answerFast tracking.Critical path method.SimulationOverall explanationFast tracking. A schedule compression technique in which activities or phases normally done in sequence are performed in parallel for at least a portion of their duration. [PMBOK Guide 6, Page 215]DomainProject Schedule Management
Question 31:
You are the project manager of the AMD project for your organization. In this project, you are currently performing quantitative risk analysis. The tool and technique you are using is a simulation where the project model is computed many times with the input values chosen at random for each iteration and Outputs representing the range of possible outcomes for the project. The goal is to create a probability distribution from the iterations for the project schedule. What technique will you use with this simulation?
Pareto charts
Expected Monetary Value
Monte Carlo Technique
Cause and effect diagram
Pareto chartsExpected Monetary ValueCorrect answerMonte Carlo TechniqueCause and effect diagramOverall explanationComputer software is used to iterate the quantitative risk analysis model several thousand times. The input values (e.g., cost estimates, duration estimates, or occurrence of probabilistic branches) are chosen at random for each iteration. Outputs represent the range of possible outcomes for the project. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 433]DomainProject Risk Management
Question 32:
In one of the design processes, some steps are consuming unnecessary time. Also, some team members are struggling as they are not well trained to perform this design effectively. How will the project manager act to improve the situation?
Suggest the design team lead to perform root cause analysis of the design issues at the earliest
Submit a request for design process audit by another department not involved in the project
Use a flowchart to find out where the defects are occurring in the design process
Ask the design team to perform process analysis for the design process
Suggest the design team lead to perform root cause analysis of the design issues at the earliestSubmit a request for design process audit by another department not involved in the projectUse a flowchart to find out where the defects are occurring in the design processCorrect answerAsk the design team to perform process analysis for the design processOverall explanationKeyword (some steps which are consuming unnecessary time). Process analysis is most relevant here due to observed constraints and non value-add work. Process analysis identifies opportunities for process improvements. This analysis also examines problems, constraints, and non-value-added activities that occur during a process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 292.DomainProject Quality Management
Question 33:
The conflict between the requirements is best resolved in favor of the:
Project manager’s boss
Customer
Team members
Sponsor
Project manager’s bossCorrect answerCustomerTeam membersSponsorOverall explanationThe conflict between the requirements should always be resolved in favor of the Customer.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 34:
A new project manager found the previous project lessons learned notes while browsing a local archive. The project manager noticed that those notes were not stored in the project management information system (PMIS). What should the project manager do with the notes?
Disregard the notes since they are not in the PMIS.
Store a local copy on their hard drive for future use.
As the notes are already available, no further action is required.
Ask the previous project manager to archive the notes in the PMIS.
Disregard the notes since they are not in the PMIS.Store a local copy on their hard drive for future use.As the notes are already available, no further action is required.Correct answerAsk the previous project manager to archive the notes in the PMIS.Overall explanationCollecting and documenting the lessons learned throughout the project and updating the organization knowledge is one of the key tasks for the project manager during the project closing phase, to comply with statutory requirements and for potential use in future projects and audits. So, the project manager of the previous project has to add the notes to the PMIS.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 35:
Rework is an example of:
Cost of contingency reserve
Cost of Conformance
Cost of quality
External Failure Costs
Cost of contingency reserveCost of ConformanceCorrect answerCost of qualityExternal Failure CostsOverall explanationThe cost of quality (COQ) associated with a project consists of Prevention costs, Appraisal costs and Failure costs (internal/external). Rework is an example of Internal Failure Costs. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 282, 283.DomainProject Quality Management
Question 36:
As a project manager, what estimating technique should you use to estimate a project using a firm-fixed-price contract?
Analogous Estimating
Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT)
Parametric Estimating
Bottom-up Estimating
Analogous EstimatingProgram Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT)Parametric EstimatingCorrect answerBottom-up EstimatingOverall explanationBottom-up Estimating will give you the most accurate estimates, and it requires a well-defined scope & accurate WBS.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 37:
Your project sponsor has specified that you have to consider the external limitations during the schedule development process. The external limitation is an example of:
Assumptions
Regulations
Constraints
Standards
AssumptionsRegulationsCorrect answerConstraintsStandardsOverall explanationThe external limitation is an example of ConstraintsDomainProject Integration Management
Question 38:
You are planning the risk responses for your project. You asked your project team to perform more tests on the critical developed applications to minimize issues during the user acceptance testing phase. This Risk Response is an example of:
Risk Transference
Risk Mitigation
Risk Avoidance
Risk Acceptance
Risk TransferenceCorrect answerRisk MitigationRisk AvoidanceRisk AcceptanceOverall explanationPerforming more tests is one way to mitigate the risk. PMBOK 6th edition, Page 443.DomainProject Risk Management
Question 39:
You are a mentor to an entry-level project manager. This manager has obtained sign-off on the requirements documentation for his project. He is now thinking about beginning project execution based on the requirements, then informs you about it and seeks your advice. What will you advise him to do next?
To monitor the status of the project and product scope and managing changes to the scope baseline
To breakdown the deliverables into work packages
To determine or define the product scope description, deliverables, exclusions and acceptance criteria
To document how requirements will be prioritized for his project
To monitor the status of the project and product scope and managing changes to the scope baselineTo breakdown the deliverables into work packagesCorrect answerTo determine or define the product scope description, deliverables, exclusions and acceptance criteriaTo document how requirements will be prioritized for his projectOverall explanationThe next thing to do after documenting requirements is to define scope. The WBS can be created only after that option: ( To breakdown the deliverables into work packages ). Approach for prioritization of requirements should have been agreed and documented (option: To document how requirements will be prioritized for his project ) before collecting requirements.DomainProject Scope Management
Question 40:
You are a project manager in a construction company. Your company would like to outsource the landscaping works to a subcontractor to complete within three months. The Budget of the Work is $ 40,000, and the scope is well defined. What type of contract you will probably choose:
Fixed-price
Cost-reimbursable
Cost plus incentive fee
Time and material
Correct answerFixed-priceCost-reimbursableCost plus incentive feeTime and materialOverall explanationFixed-price contracts. This category of contracts involves setting a fixed total price for a defined product, service, or result to be provided. These contracts should be used when the requirements are well defined and no significant changes to the scope are expected. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 471.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 41:
A project to develop a new retail banking product is in progress. The project has fallen behind schedule because team members are lacking motivation. What should the project manager do to motivate the project team?
Offer recognition and rewards.
Delegates the responsibilities.
Apply creative problem solving.
Use coaching and monitoring skills.
Correct answerOffer recognition and rewards.Delegates the responsibilities.Apply creative problem solving.Use coaching and monitoring skills.Overall explanationThe team members are lacking motivation. So the best thing should the project manager do to motivate them is to Offer recognition and rewards. People are motivated when they feel they are valued in the organization and this value is demonstrated by the rewards given to them. Generally, money is viewed as a tangible aspect of any reward system, but intangible rewards could be equally or even more effective. Most project team members are motivated by an opportunity to grow, accomplish, be appreciated, and apply their professional skills to meet new challenges. A good strategy for project managers is to give the team recognition throughout the life cycle of the project rather than waiting until the project is completed. PMBOK 6th edition Page, 342DomainProject Resource Management
Question 42:
Midway through the design phase of a software development project, the project manager realizes that planned tasks will be delivered late. What should the project manager do first?
Revise the task delivery dates in the project management plan.
Assume the delay, and report it during the next stakeholder meeting.
Email stakeholders about the delay, and update the project management plan.
Update the issue log.
Revise the task delivery dates in the project management plan.Assume the delay, and report it during the next stakeholder meeting.Email stakeholders about the delay, and update the project management plan.Correct answerUpdate the issue log.Overall explanationKeyword (planned tasks will be delivered late) its an issue and the project manager should Update the issue log. The issue log will help the project manager effectively track and manage issues, ensuring that they are investigated and resolved. PMBOK 6th edition Page, 96DomainProject Integration Management
Question 43:
Ben is the project manager for a mobile application development project. Ben has just finished the kick-off meeting. What is the next project phase?
Executing
Planning
Closing
Monitoring and Controlling
Correct answerExecutingPlanningClosingMonitoring and ControllingOverall explanationThe project kick-off meeting is usually associated with the end of planning, so the next phase is Executing. PMBOK 6th edition, Page 86.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 44:
Your quality team tested an electronic component created during the project, and the test failed. The cost of such testing classified as:
External failure cost
Appraisal cost
Internal failure cost
Appraisal and internal failure costs
External failure costAppraisal costInternal failure costCorrect answerAppraisal and internal failure costsOverall explanationA failed test incurs both appraisal cost (test cost) and internal failure cost (since the test was done internally by your team). Moreover, The control quality process has related costs, which are mainly the appraisal costs and internal failure costs. PMBOK Guide 6, Pages 275, 283.DomainProject Quality Management
Question 45:
Which of the following items can be established by creating the Cost Management Plan on a project?
Level of accuracy and Work Packages
Units of Measure and Quality Metrics
Rules of Performance Measurement and Rewards
Control Thresholds and Units of Measure
Level of accuracy and Work PackagesUnits of Measure and Quality MetricsRules of Performance Measurement and RewardsCorrect answerControl Thresholds and Units of MeasureOverall explanationA Cost Management Plan establishes Control Thresholds and Units of Measure. Control Thresholds are typically expressed as a percentage of deviation from the baseline. Units of Measure is defined as units such as staff hours or staff days.[PMBOK 6th edition, Page 238]DomainProject Cost Management
Question 46:
You are managing a project that has a one-year duration. During the project execution, you find that the quality standards require a major change because the project quality standards you are working on are not effective. As a project manager, what should you do?
Follow the Communication management plan
Follow the risk management plan
Follow the change management plan
Follow the scope management plan
Follow the Communication management planFollow the risk management planCorrect answerFollow the change management planFollow the scope management planOverall explanationChange management plan. Describes how the change requests throughout the project will be formally authorized and incorporated. The change management plan defines the process for managing change on the project.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 47:
Which of the following business documents that Justify why the project is authorized?
Project charter.
Business case
Scope statement of work.
Project management plan.
Project charter.Correct answerBusiness caseScope statement of work.Project management plan.Overall explanationThe business need and the cost-benefit analysis are contained in the business case to justify and establish boundaries for the project. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 77]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 48:
While Estimating costs - you are expecting some rework in deliverables. However, the amount of rework is not known. This is an example of:
Management reserves
Contingency Reserves
Three-Point Estimation
Bottom-Up Estimation
Management reservesCorrect answerContingency ReservesThree-Point EstimationBottom-Up EstimationOverall explanationExpecting rework is known. However, the ‘amount’ of rework is unknown - which is an ‘unknown.’ Contingency reserves are meant for ‘known unknowns’ such as - risks which are identified and accepted.DomainProject Cost Management
Question 49:
The project manager and his team started identifying individual project risks and sources of overall project risk and documenting their characteristics. Which of the following is a data analysis technique used in this process?
Root cause analysis
Brainstorming
Probability and impact matrix
Interviews
Correct answerRoot cause analysisBrainstormingProbability and impact matrixInterviewsOverall explanationRoot cause analysis is a data analysis technique used in identify risk process .typically used to discover the underlying causes that lead to a problem and develop preventive action. It can be used to determine threats by starting with a problem statement and exploring which threats might result in that problem occurring. The same technique can be used to find opportunities by beginning with a benefit statement and exploring which opportunities might result in that benefit being realized. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 415 .DomainProject Risk Management
Question 50:
During the implementation phase, you noticed that a competitor would be ready to put the same product into the marketplace. What should you do next?
Update the project charter
Cost benefit analysis
Stakeholders analysis
Advise the sponsor to cancel the project
Update the project charterCorrect answerCost benefit analysisStakeholders analysisAdvise the sponsor to cancel the projectOverall explanationWhen the competitor is ready to put the same product in the marketplace you must make a cost-benefit analysis to see if you will continue in the project or cancel it. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 111.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 51:
You have just been moved onto a project that is well into the project implementation phase. You then realize that no stakeholder register exists for the project. Since you are new to the organization, you want to ensure that you use its templates for documents. Therefore, you search for a template for a stakeholder registered in the:
Project management plan
Organizational process assets
Enterprise environmental factors
Stakeholder management plan
Project management planCorrect answerOrganizational process assetsEnterprise environmental factorsStakeholder management planOverall explanationOrganizational process assets are inputs in Identify Stakeholders process and include Stakeholder register templates. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 510]DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 52:
A project manager is in the process of obtaining seller responses, selecting a seller and awarding a contract. Which of the following is most likely to include a procurement statement of work (SOW) and request for proposal (RFP)?
Procurement documentation
Procurement management plan
Project Management plan
Quality reports
Correct answerProcurement documentationProcurement management planProject Management planQuality reportsOverall explanationThe question suggests that the Conduct Procurements process is underway. Procurement documentation provides a written record used in reaching the legal agreement and can include bid documents, procurement statement of work Of the available options, only the procurement documentation contains all of the elements specified by the question. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 485]DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 53:
The business case documents the business needs and the cost-benefit analysis that justifies the project. The summary of how the project has achieved the business needs identified in the business case is documented in the:
Project final report
Project Scope Statement
Project charter
Project WBS
Correct answerProject final reportProject Scope StatementProject charterProject WBSOverall explanationThe summary of how the project has achieved the business needs identified in the business case is included in a project’s final report. The other choices are either project initiating or planning documents. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 128]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 54:
Your customer requested a change to the project that would increase the project risk. As a project manager, what should you do next?
Talk to the customer about the impact of the change
A workaround
Analyze the impact of the change with the team on other project constraints
Change the risk management plan
Talk to the customer about the impact of the changeA workaroundCorrect answerAnalyze the impact of the change with the team on other project constraintsChange the risk management planOverall explanationFirst, you should analyze the impact with the team members on all project constraints ( Cost, Time, Quality, resources,…)DomainProject Integration Management
Question 55:
Brad is the Project Manager of a new data migration project. The Project sponsor has information about the project which is behind schedule and over budget, but he wants more details about the progress of the project. As a Project manager, what should you provide to the project sponsor about the STATUS of the project?
Work performance report
Work performance data
Work performance information
Earned value report
Correct answerWork performance reportWork performance dataWork performance informationEarned value reportOverall explanationSponsor know that the project is behind schedule and over budget so he Knows EV report so the next step the project manager should provide to sponsor ( work performance report ) because WPR includes status reports and progress reports. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 382]DomainProject Communications Management
Question 56:
As you work to prepare your quality management plan for your project. Which of the following can help you to have an overview of the tests required to verify requirements?
Review the Quality metrics
Review the requirements traceability matrix
Use a checklist
Review project scope statement
Review the Quality metricsCorrect answerReview the requirements traceability matrixUse a checklistReview project scope statementOverall explanationThe requirements traceability matrix links product requirements to deliverables and helps to ensure each requirement in the requirements documentation is tested. The matrix provides an overview of the tests required to verify the requirements. ( PMBOK Guide 6th Edition, page 280 )DomainProject Quality Management
Question 57:
The total budget of a 12-month project is US$ 2 million. The project’s first three months indicate a cost to date of US$500,000, the earned value is US$ 525,000, and the total amount spent till now is US$ 550,000. What is the project status?
On schedule and on budget.
Behind schedule and over schedule.
Ahead of schedule and under budget.
Ahead of schedule and over budget.
On schedule and on budget.Behind schedule and over schedule.Ahead of schedule and under budget.Correct answerAhead of schedule and over budget.Overall explanationA cost to date (PV) = US$500,000 && Earned value (EV) = 525,000. && Actual cost (AC) = 550,000…. EV < AC and EV > PV SO the project is Ahead of schedule and over budget. Very important questionDomainProject Cost Management
Question 58:
As a project manager, if you want to determine the best corrective action in terms of cost in case of project deviations, which of the following data analysis techniques should you use?
Variance analysis
Earned value analysis
Cost-benefit analysis
Trend analysis
Variance analysisEarned value analysisCorrect answerCost-benefit analysisTrend analysisOverall explanationThe cost-benefit analysis helps to determine the best corrective action in terms of cost in case of project deviations. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 111]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 59:
A project manager wants to ensure sufficient stakeholder participation throughout a project’s Life cycle.. What should the project manager include in the stakeholder engagement plan?
Stakeholder power/interest grid.
Change requests initiated by stakeholders.
Feedback from stakeholders on project operations.
Desired and current stakeholder engagement levels.
Stakeholder power/interest grid.Change requests initiated by stakeholders.Feedback from stakeholders on project operations.Correct answerDesired and current stakeholder engagement levels.Overall explanationA stakeholder engagement assessment matrix supports comparison between the current engagement levels of stakeholders and the desired engagement levels required for successful project delivery. To to ensure sufficient stakeholder participation throughout a project’s Life cycle , the project manager should include the Desired and current stakeholder engagement levels in the stakeholder engagement plan. PMBOK 6th edition Page,521DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 60:
Which of the following inputs is a main input for the initiation processes?
Organizational process assets
Requirements traceability matrix
Project management plan
Expert judgment
Correct answerOrganizational process assetsRequirements traceability matrixProject management planExpert judgmentOverall explanationOrganizational process assets are inputs for developing the project charter process and identify the stakeholder processDomainProject Integration Management
Question 61:
You are a project manager for a software project. Which of the following data representation techniques that can be used in understanding and estimating the cost of quality for a process?
Process maps
Matrix diagrams
Logical data model
Prioritization matrix
Correct answerProcess mapsMatrix diagramsLogical data modelPrioritization matrixOverall explanationFlowcharts are also referred to as process maps because they display the sequence of steps and the branching possibilities that exist for a process that transforms one or more inputs into one or more outputs. Flowcharts may prove useful in understanding and estimating the cost of quality for a process.[PMBOK 6th edition, Page 284]DomainProject Quality Management
Question 62:
A project manager is running a complex transformation project. During a team briefing, the lead resource raises a concern that a critical milestone is being affected because tasks are taking longer than expected. What should the project manager do?
Review the project management plan to identify how the estimates were built.
Identify corrective actions and raise the issue to the change control board CCB if needed.
Inform the project sponsor of the expected delay and potential impact.
Increase the number of resources to ensure that milestones are achieved.
Review the project management plan to identify how the estimates were built.Correct answerIdentify corrective actions and raise the issue to the change control board CCB if needed.Inform the project sponsor of the expected delay and potential impact.Increase the number of resources to ensure that milestones are achieved.Overall explanationSince the critical milestone is being affected because tasks are taking longer than expected. The project manager should Identify corrective actions and raise the issue to the change control board CCB if needed. Option ( Increase the number of resources to ensure that milestones are achieved. ) is the next step after CCB approval.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 63:
A project’s primary focus is staying on schedule. To monitor this, the project manager requests monthly progress reports from the contractor. What should the project manager ask the contractor to include in these reports?
Work breakdown structure (WBS)
Schedule attributes.
Gantt chart.
Network chart.
Work breakdown structure (WBS)Schedule attributes.Correct answerGantt chart.Network chart.Overall explanationThe project manager should ask the contractor to include in these reports the Gantt charts Also known as bar charts because its represent schedule information where activities are listed on the vertical axis, dates are shown on the horizontal axis, and activity durations are shown as horizontal bars placed according to start and finish dates. Bar charts are relatively easy to read and are commonly used. [PMBOK Guide 6, Page 217]DomainProject Schedule Management
Question 64:
In an agile project you manage, the flow of work is often interrupted by various delays or impediments. What should you do?
You should begin by training project team members the concepts and principles of the agile mindset.
Make work visible using kanban boards and experimenting
You should use a flow based agile to ease agile concepts to project team members.
You should use various test-driven development practices.
You should begin by training project team members the concepts and principles of the agile mindset.Correct answerMake work visible using kanban boards and experimentingYou should use a flow based agile to ease agile concepts to project team members.You should use various test-driven development practices.Overall explanationIn this case if the flow of work is often interrupted by various delays or impediments you should consider Make work visible using kanban boards and experimenting. Agile Practice Guide, Page 32DomainProject Resource Management
Question 65:
Which of the following data representation techniques meet the following criteria: helps to Categorize stakeholders and combine the grid elements into a three-dimensional model that can be useful to project managers and teams in identifying and engaging their stakeholder community and assists with the development of communication strategies?
Power/influence grid
Probability and impact matrix
Stakeholder cube
Power/interest grid
Power/influence gridProbability and impact matrixCorrect answerStakeholder cubePower/interest gridOverall explanationStakeholder cube. This is a refinement of the grid models previously mentioned. This model combines the grid elements into a three-dimensional model that can be useful to project managers and teams in identifying and engaging their stakeholder community. It provides a model with multiple dimensions that improve the depiction of the stakeholder community as a multidimensional entity and assists with the development of communication strategies. PMBOK 6th edition, Page 513.DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 66:
Mark is a project manager working for a construction company. As part of his current project, he oversees the inspection of deliverables, measuring them against documented requirements and acceptance criteria for obtaining the stakeholders’ formal acceptance of the project deliverables. What project management process is he performing?
Validate Scope
Control Quality
Control Scope
Manage Quality
Correct answerValidate ScopeControl QualityControl ScopeManage QualityOverall explanationVALIDATE SCOPE: TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES: inspection includes activities such as measuring, examining and validating to determine whether work and deliverables meet requirements and product acceptance criteria. Inspections are sometimes called reviews, product reviews, and walkthroughs. In some application areas, these different terms have unique and specific meanings. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 166.DomainProject Scope Management
Question 67:
You have just been assigned as project manager for a large manufacturing project. You want to understand the process for preparing the project scope statement and how the formal acceptance of the completed project deliverables will be obtained. Which of the following will you have to check?
The stakeholder management plan
The requirements management plan
The scope management plan
The quality management plan
The stakeholder management planThe requirements management planCorrect answerThe scope management planThe quality management planOverall explanationThe scope management plan is a component of the project management plan that contains information and guidance on how the scope and the scope-related processes are to be managed. What is included varies, but should contain procedures and processes specifying how the formal acceptance of the completed project deliverables will be obtained. Acceptance of project deliverables is influenced by other project management plans, such as the stakeholder management plan and the quality management plan. Nevertheless, the scope management plan is what specifies the process most directly. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 137]DomainProject Scope Management
Question 68:
You are working with your customers on completing deliverables in your electronic parts manufacturing project. Which of the following stakeholders can modify and make changes in the project charter?
The project sponsor
The project customer
The team members
All stakeholders
Correct answerThe project sponsorThe project customerThe team membersAll stakeholdersOverall explanationThe sponsor is the only person who can modify and make changes in the project charter.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 69:
Your organization has announced a major transformation program. You have been selected as the project manager for one of the process improvement projects. You are now selecting your project team. Which of the following should be one of your considerations while selecting your team?
Select team members who are geographically distributed but 100% available for the project.
Select team members who can be collocated and are 100% available for the project.
Select team members who can either be collocated or are at least 50% available for the project.
Select team members who can either be collocated or are at least 25% available for the project.
Select team members who are geographically distributed but 100% available for the project.Correct answerSelect team members who can be collocated and are 100% available for the project.Select team members who can either be collocated or are at least 50% available for the project.Select team members who can either be collocated or are at least 25% available for the project.Overall explanationIn practice, the most effective Agile teams are collocated and are made 100% available for the project. Agile Practice Guide, Page 39.DomainProject Resource Management
Question 70:
You are working with your team on estimating how much time each activity will take. One of the documents you are using contains information on categories of labor, material, and equipment required to complete your project. You are also interested to see the skill level of your laborers, any certifications required, and grade levels of your supplies. Which of the following documents would you primarily refer to for this purpose?
Work breakdown structure
Organizational breakdown structure
Resource breakdown structure
Risk breakdown structure
Work breakdown structureOrganizational breakdown structureCorrect answerResource breakdown structureRisk breakdown structureOverall explanationBased on the scenario described, the project team is performing the Estimate Activity Durations process. An input to this process is the resource breakdown structure (RBS) which is a hierarchical list of team and physical resources related by category and resource type that is used for planning, managing, and controlling project work. Each descending level represents an increasingly detailed description of the resource until the information is small enough to be used in conjunction with the WBS to allow the work to be planned, monitored, and controlled. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 198]DomainProject Schedule Management
Question 71:
As part of the initiation process, what should the project manager do before the planning stage?
Start gathering requirements and plan the kick-off meeting.
Define the project sign-off criteria and create a risk register.
Develop the project charter and identify the stakeholders.
Acquire the resources and determine the budget.
Start gathering requirements and plan the kick-off meeting.Define the project sign-off criteria and create a risk register.Correct answerDevelop the project charter and identify the stakeholders.Acquire the resources and determine the budget.Overall explanationIn the initiation phase, the project manager should Develop the project charter and identify the stakeholders prior to the planning stage.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 72:
A project manager is managing a project to build a telecommunications tower. The project requires a crane, but the booked crane received a last-minute reassignment to a higher-priority government project. What should the project manager do first?
Review the service agreement with the vendor.
Add this to the issue log.
Prepare resolution for the situation.
Escalate the solution to stakeholders.
Review the service agreement with the vendor.Correct answerAdd this to the issue log.Prepare resolution for the situation.Escalate the solution to stakeholders.Overall explanationKeyword ( FIRST) The project manager should first Add this issue to the issue log. Then Prepare resolution for the situation. Note: If he ask what is the best course of action, then the best answer is Prepare resolution for the situation.DomainProject Resource Management
Question 73:
The Requirements Elicitation Team has generated a large number of ideas to gather product and project requirements. Which of the following techniques is best suited to generate, organize information, and allow large numbers of ideas to be classified into groups for review and analysis?
Brainstorming
Idea/mind mapping
Nominal group technique
Affinity diagram
BrainstormingIdea/mind mappingNominal group techniqueCorrect answerAffinity diagramOverall explanationAffinity diagrams allow large numbers of ideas to be classified into groups for review and analysis. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 144.DomainProject Scope Management
Question 74:
You are managing the changes made to the scope baseline. The causes of variances and the reasoning behind the corrective action chosen should be included in:
Recommended corrective action
Lessons learned register
Scope management plan
Risk Register
Recommended corrective actionCorrect answerLessons learned registerScope management planRisk RegisterOverall explanationThe lessons learned register could be updated with techniques that are efficient and effective in controlling scope, including causes of variances and corrective actions chosen.[PMBOK 6th edition, Page 171]DomainProject Scope Management
Question 75:
You are over budget and it is impossible to complete the project with the given budget. Therefore, you raise the change request which your management approves. After the change request is approved, you update the cost baseline and update other project documents. The document used to register any changes which occur during the project execution is known as:
Issue log
RACI matrix
Risk register
Change log
Issue logRACI matrixRisk registerCorrect answerChange logOverall explanationIn the change log, you record any change that occurs during the project, along with its impact on any project objective [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 120 ]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 76:
A project is contracted on a Cost-Plus-Fixed-Fee (CPFF) basis with a Fixed fee of US $5,000. The estimated cost is US$50,000. If the project comes in at US$60,000 with no changes in project scope, what would be the total cost of the contract?
US$80,000
US$75,000
US$55,000
US$65,000
US$80,000US$75,000US$55,000Correct answerUS$65,000Overall explanationIn a Cost-Plus-Fixed-Fee (CPFF) type of contract, the seller is reimbursed for allowable costs and receives a fixed fee payment calculated as a percentage of the estimated project costs. The fixed fee does not vary with actual costs unless the project scope changes. In the current scenario, the fixed fee is US$5,000. Although the actual project comes in at US$ 60,000, the fixed fee remains the same. Hence, the total cost of the contract will be 60,000 + 5,000 = 65,000. PMBOK 6th edition, Page 472.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 77:
During the implementation phase, one of your project team has told you that the cement will delay one week. As a project manager, what document should you refer to FIRST?
Risk management plan
Risk Register
Issue Log
Risk Response Plan
Risk management planCorrect answerRisk RegisterIssue LogRisk Response PlanOverall explanationYou should refer First to Risk Register to check this risk was identified before or not. If yes so this identified risk and you should implement the response. if not identified before so this unidentified risk occurred and you should do workaround.DomainProject Risk Management
Question 78:
A project manager is in the process of analyzing activity sequences, durations, resource requirements, and schedule constraints to create an approved project schedule. What should the project manager do NEXT?
Determine resource requirement for each activity in the project
Use techniques like Critical Path method and What-if Analysis to calculate optimum duration of the project
Use the approved schedule duration as a baseline and start tracking the project
Create a network diagram of the project using one of the diagramming methods
Determine resource requirement for each activity in the projectUse techniques like Critical Path method and What-if Analysis to calculate optimum duration of the projectCorrect answerUse the approved schedule duration as a baseline and start tracking the projectCreate a network diagram of the project using one of the diagramming methodsOverall explanationThe project manager is in the “develop schedule” process and has already derived an approved project schedule. Other options are already completed as part of the processes estimate activity resources, develop schedule, and sequence activities. The next step would be to treat this estimate as a schedule baseline and start tracking the project as part of the control schedule process.DomainProject Schedule Management
Question 79:
You are a project manager working on a strict deadline. You find a work package on the critical path, which is highly complex and could delay the final delivery of your product. After consulting your customer, you decide to drop this work package from the project. Which risk response strategies do you use in this case?
Sharing
Exploit
Avoid
Escalate
SharingExploitCorrect answerAvoidEscalateOverall explanationAs a project manager, you use risk avoidance or elimination by not doing the activity. Other approaches are reduction by mitigating the risk, sharing by outsourcing, or insuring and retention by accepting and budgeting for project risks.DomainProject Risk Management
Question 80:
You are a project manager of a company, and your project is currently in the execution phase. One of your project teams leave the site early at 3:00 pm Friday and mistreats his colleagues. You would like to establish clear expectations regarding the acceptable behavior of the team member. To avoid such situations, you should create:
The team charter
Interpersonal skills
Team-building activities
Management skills
Correct answerThe team charterInterpersonal skillsTeam-building activitiesManagement skillsOverall explanationThe team charter establishes clear expectations regarding acceptable behavior by project team members. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 320]DomainProject Resource Management
Question 81:
A project manager for a software development project has collected the work performance data and used the requirements documentation and requirements traceability matrix to generate the work performance information regarding variances in the project work compared to the baseline. What process is the project manager performing?
Control Scope
Validate Scope
Direct and Manage Project Work
Manage Quality
Correct answerControl ScopeValidate ScopeDirect and Manage Project WorkManage QualityOverall explanationTo answer this question correctly, it is important to understand how work performance data is transformed into work performance information. Work performance data is produced as a result of project execution. The work performance data can then be analyzed during various controlling processes to produce work performance information (see the image below). Work performance information is only produced as an output during the Monitoring and Controlling Process Group. In this scenario, the question suggests that a variance analysis has been performed using work performance data in order to produce work performance information. Thus, it can be concluded that the process underway is part of the Monitoring and Controlling Process Group, and the two answer choices representing executing processes can be eliminated. Both the Validate Scope and Control Scope processes produce work performance information as an output. However, only the Control Scope process uses variance analysis to produce work performance information regarding variances in the project work compared to the scope baseline. Therefore, of the available choices, the project manager must be executing the Control Scope process.DomainProject Scope Management
Question 82:
You are developing a quality management plan for your project. During the planning process, one of your team members told you that, in the past, the organization had completed a similar project. You started to review the old project and found that some of its quality metrics can be used in your project. This technique is known as:
Prototyping
Process analysis
Reviewing organization process assets
Benchmarking
PrototypingProcess analysisReviewing organization process assetsCorrect answerBenchmarkingOverall explanationIn benchmarking, you compare the current project parameters with past comparable project parameters to identify the best practices and ideas for improvement. PMBOK 6th edition, Page 281.DomainProject Quality Management
Question 83:
During the planning phase of your project, you identified several internal stakeholders in various departments: the IT department, HR department, and technical department. Also, you identified several external stakeholders such as vendors, subcontractors, governmental organizations. What is the best way to distribute information for such numbers of stakeholders?
Classify the stakeholders by interest/ influence grid.
Establish a strict communication models system
Classify the stakeholders into groups and send them the required information only
Use interactive communications with the various numbers of stakeholders
Classify the stakeholders by interest/ influence grid.Establish a strict communication models systemCorrect answerClassify the stakeholders into groups and send them the required information onlyUse interactive communications with the various numbers of stakeholdersOverall explanationWhen there are several internal stakeholders in various departments and external several stakeholders, you should Classify the stakeholders into groups and send them the required information only.DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 84:
After finalizing some activities for the project, the customer is not satisfied and complains that his requirements are not being met. In which of the following processes should the project manager have involved him to ensure approval?
Collect requirements
Close project or phase
Develop Project charter
Validate scope
Collect requirementsClose project or phaseDevelop Project charterCorrect answerValidate scopeOverall explanationValidate Scope is the process of formalizing acceptance of the completed project deliverables. The key benefit of this process is that it brings objectivity to the acceptance process and increases the probability of the final product. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 163]DomainProject Scope Management
Question 85:
Which of the following is an estimating technique that uses a statistical relationship between historical data and project parameters to calculate the activity duration?
Top-down estimating
Bottom-up estimating
Parametric estimating
Three-Point estimating
Top-down estimatingBottom-up estimatingCorrect answerParametric estimatingThree-Point estimatingOverall explanationParametric estimating is an estimating technique in which an algorithm is used to calculate cost or duration based on historical data and project parameters. Parametric estimating uses a statistical relationship between historical data and other variables (e.g., square footage in construction) to calculate an estimate for activity parameters, such as cost, budget, and duration. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 200.DomainProject Schedule Management
Question 86:
During the execution of a project, the project manager discovers that one branch team’s tasks are being ineffectively influenced by one team member. What should a project manager use to ensure good working relationships among team members?
Ground rules.
Team-building activities.
Recognition and rewards.
Interpersonal skills.
Ground rules.Correct answerTeam-building activities.Recognition and rewards.Interpersonal skills.Overall explanationKeyword ( ineffectively - good working relationships among team members ) The objective of team-building activities is to help individual team members work together effectively. Team-building strategies are particularly valuable when team members operate from remote locations without the benefit of face-to-face contact. Informal communication and activities can help in building trust and establishing good working relationships. Note : team-building activities is a part of Interpersonal skills. but here you should use the son not father. PMBOK 6th edition page, 341DomainProject Resource Management
Question 87:
A project manager joined a project with cross-functional stakeholders and a fixed go-live date. The project manager wants to quickly gather requirements and ensure all stakeholders are aligned so that any conflicts are flagged as early as possible. What should the project manager do?
Use facilitation techniques with all stakeholders.
Set up job-shadowing sessions for all stakeholders.
Conduct individual interviews with each stakeholder.
Send a questionnaire to all stakeholders.
Correct answerUse facilitation techniques with all stakeholders.Set up job-shadowing sessions for all stakeholders.Conduct individual interviews with each stakeholder.Send a questionnaire to all stakeholders.Overall explanationKeyword ( cross-functional stakeholders ). Facilitation is used with focused sessions that bring key stakeholders together to define product requirements. Workshops can be used to quickly define cross-functional requirements and reconcile stakeholder differences. Because of their interactive group nature, well-facilitated sessions can build trust, foster relationships, and improve communication among the participants, which can lead to increased stakeholder consensus. In addition, issues can be discovered earlier and resolved more quickly than in individual sessions. PMBOK 6th edition Page, 145DomainProject Scope Management
Question 88:
During a weekly status meeting, a team member informed the project manager that the design submitted to the local government for approval was rejected, due to an error in the blueprint. Resubmission will require an additional two weeks. What should the project manager do first?
Inform the project sponsor and look for support
Update the issue log and identify the possible cause of the error.
Review the reject submission and begin working on the resubmission.
Add another layer of review for future projects to avoid similar problems.
Inform the project sponsor and look for supportCorrect answerUpdate the issue log and identify the possible cause of the error.Review the reject submission and begin working on the resubmission.Add another layer of review for future projects to avoid similar problems.Overall explanationResubmission of the design will require an additional two weeks this is an issue and the project manager should FIRST Update the issue log and identify the possible cause of the error.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 89:
As a project manager, in which document will you find information about Project Scope Description, Project Deliverables, and Project Exclusions?
Project charter
Change log
Scope baseline
Stakeholder register
Project charterChange logCorrect answerScope baselineStakeholder registerOverall explanationProject scope description, Project deliverables and Project exclusions included in scope statement which a part of scope baseline[PMBOK 6th edition, Page 161]DomainProject Scope Management
Question 90:
You are a project manager in a big construction project. The project sponsor told you that the project would be terminated. You already signed a contract with a supplier, and the supplier started supplying materials. As a project manager, what is the first thing you should do?
Follow the procedures of close procurement.
Ask the vendor to stop supplying.
Negotiating with vendor
Review the contract terms
Follow the procedures of close procurement.Correct answerAsk the vendor to stop supplying.Negotiating with vendorReview the contract termsOverall explanationThe first step you should ask the vendor to stop supplying then you should follow the procedures of close procurement.DomainProject Procurement Management
Question 91:
A project manager has two projects of equal strategic organizational importance. However, due to budget constraints, one only can be chosen. There are uncertainties and risks associated with both projects. What tool or technique should the project manager use to decide which project to choose?
Influence diagram.
Simulations
Decision tree analysis.
Sensitivity analysis.
Influence diagram.SimulationsCorrect answerDecision tree analysis.Sensitivity analysis.Overall explanationKeyword ( two projects -There are uncertainties- which project to choose ) Decision trees analysis are used to support selection of the best of several alternative courses of action. Alternative paths through the project are shown in the decision tree using branches representing different decisions or events, each of which can have associated costs and related individual project risks (including both threats and opportunities). The end-points of branches in the decision tree represent the outcome from following that particular path, which can be negative or positive. The decision tree is evaluated by calculating the expected monetary value of each branch, allowing the optimal path to be selected. PMBOK 6th edition page, 435DomainProject Risk Management
Question 92:
A risk that is not listed in the risk register occurred. What will the project manager do to obtain funding to respond to this risk?
Estimate the cost of the action and take it from the approved cost baseline
Estimate the cost of the action and take it from the management reserve which is part of the project budget
Estimate the cost of the action and take it from the Contingency reserve which is part of the time phased budget
Estimate the cost of the action, take it from the approved cost baseline but reduce this amount from the baseline
Estimate the cost of the action and take it from the approved cost baselineCorrect answerEstimate the cost of the action and take it from the management reserve which is part of the project budgetEstimate the cost of the action and take it from the Contingency reserve which is part of the time phased budgetEstimate the cost of the action, take it from the approved cost baseline but reduce this amount from the baselineOverall explanationAs this is an unplanned risk, the funding should be provided by the management reserve which is part of the project budget and not the cost baseline.DomainProject Risk Management
Question 93:
The PMO requested the project manager to start calculating the cost contingency reserve for the project activities. As a project manager, how should you calculate contingency reserves?
Earned value analysis
Trend analysis
What-if scenario analysis
Percentage of the estimated cost
Earned value analysisTrend analysisWhat-if scenario analysisCorrect answerPercentage of the estimated costOverall explanationThe contingency reserve may be a percentage of the estimated cost, a fixed number, or maybe developed by using quantitative analysis methods such as Monte Carlo Analysis, Decision Tree Analysis and EMV (Expected Monetary Value).. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 427]DomainProject Cost Management
Question 94:
Jack is the project manager of a project that is halfway through its execution. The project sponsor wants to add a new feature that wasn’t defined during the initial requirement gathering phase. 15,000 USD will be required to add this feature. What should Jack do?
The Project manager should Use 15,000 USD of contingency reserves.
Issue a change request to increase the cost budget by 15,000 USD
The Project manager should inform the sponsor that this change cant be implemented due to cost implication.
Seek approval from management to increase the project budget by 15,000 USD
The Project manager should Use 15,000 USD of contingency reserves.Correct answerIssue a change request to increase the cost budget by 15,000 USDThe Project manager should inform the sponsor that this change cant be implemented due to cost implication. Seek approval from management to increase the project budget by 15,000 USDOverall explanationThe new feature will require 15,000 USD to be added, so the baseline will be affected due to this change. So the project manager should Issue a change request to increase the cost budget by 15,000 USD.DomainProject Cost Management
Question 95:
A Stakeholder has become supportive after he was resistant. As a project manager, what should you do next?
Update Risk Register
Update Issue log
Update Stakeholder engagement assessment matrix
Update Communications Management plan
Update Risk RegisterUpdate Issue logCorrect answerUpdate Stakeholder engagement assessment matrixUpdate Communications Management planOverall explanationA stakeholder engagement assessment matrix supports the comparison between the current engagement levels of stakeholders and the desired engagement levels required for successful project delivery. So when Stakeholder has become supportive after he was resistive, you should update the matrix [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 521]DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 96:
A client approached a design team member requesting to stop an ongoing task to develop a new concept. The new concept will significantly change the design and impact the project budget and schedule. The team member asked the project manager for the next course of action. What should the project manager do?
Refer to the perform integrated change control process.
Accept the request and make the changes.
Hold a team meeting to discuss the request.
Ask the client to refrain from directly contacting team members.
Correct answerRefer to the perform integrated change control process.Accept the request and make the changes.Hold a team meeting to discuss the request.Ask the client to refrain from directly contacting team members.Overall explanationSince the new concept be developed will significantly change the design, and impact the project budget and schedule, the project manager should Refer to the perform integrated change control process to manage this change.DomainProject Integration Management
Question 97:
Which of the following techniques is used to create and connect people to information, and is effective for sharing simple, unambiguous, and codified explicit knowledge?
Multi criteria decision analysis
Focus groups
Information Management
Benchmarking
Multi criteria decision analysisFocus groupsCorrect answerInformation ManagementBenchmarkingOverall explanationInformation management tools and techniques are used to create and connect people to information. They are effective for sharing simple, unambiguous, codified explicit knowledge. [PMBOK 6th edition, Page 103]DomainProject Integration Management
Question 98:
For a project, Earned value = 40,000, Actual Cost = 50,000, and BAC = 200,000. What is the Estimate to Complete (ETC) for the project if the work is performed at the budgeted rate?
200,000
160,000
210,000
250,000
200,000Correct answer160,000210,000250,000Overall explanationThe calculation used for EAC is EAC = AC + BAC - EV = 50,000 + 200,000 - 40,000 = $210,000. Since ETC = EAC - AC = 210,000 - 50,000 = $160,000. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 267.DomainProject Cost Management
Question 99:
During an audit, it was noted that only 20 percent of completed projects had documented the lessons learned. The project managers were requested to update their completed project’s lessons learned register immediately. Where the lessons learned should be updated?
Quality process Assets.
Organizational process Assets
Stakeholder responsibility matrix.
Change control documentation.
Quality process Assets.Correct answerOrganizational process AssetsStakeholder responsibility matrix.Change control documentation.Overall explanationThe lessons learned is updated in the Organizational process Assets .DomainProject Integration Management
Question 100:
You are managing a software project. You want to determine who might participate in identifying risks to the project and who will act as risk owners. Which of the following documents should you review?
RACI chart
Risk breakdown structure (RBS)
Stakeholder engagement plan
Stakeholder register
RACI chartRisk breakdown structure (RBS)Stakeholder engagement planCorrect answerStakeholder registerOverall explanationThe project team is performing the Identify Risks Process. One input to this process is the stakeholder register. The stakeholder register indicates which individuals or groups might participate in identifying risks to the project. It also details those individuals who are available to act as risk owners. PMBOK 6th edition, Page 413.DomainProject Stakeholder Management
Question 1:
A stakeholder who was incorrectly classified as a supporter is now reluctant, and the project manager becomes worried. What should the project manager do more carefully in future projects?
Conduct a meeting with senior management
Develop interpersonal skills to manage stakeholder expectations
Identify stakeholders.
Create the stakeholders’ engagement assessment matrix
Conduct a meeting with senior managementDevelop interpersonal skills to manage stakeholder expectationsIdentify stakeholders.Correct answerCreate the stakeholders’ engagement assessment matrixOverall explanationA stakeholder engagement assessment matrix supports the comparison between the current engagement levels of stakeholders and the desired engagement levels required for successful project delivery. The stakeholder engagement assessment matrix, shown in Figure 13-6, displays gaps between current and desired engagement levels of individual stakeholders. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 521.
Question 2:
You have been assigned as the project manager for a project that is expected to last five months. The project has a budget of $450,000 and should be implemented in three different departments in your organization. After two months, you review the project’s status and discover that it is 35 percent completed. Which of the following statements is true about your project?
Your project is ahead of schedule
You cannot determine if your project is behind or ahead of schedule from the information given.
Your project is on schedule
Your project is behind schedule
Your project is ahead of scheduleYou cannot determine if your project is behind or ahead of schedule from the information given.Your project is on scheduleCorrect answerYour project is behind scheduleOverall explanationThe project is five months long, so you are scheduled to complete 20 percent of the work every month. We know PV = BAC * planned completion percentage. After two months, the planned value (PV) should be $450,00040%= $180,000. We know EV=BACactual completion percentage, after two months, you completed 35% of the work, so the earned value (EV) is $450,000*35%=$157,500. So SPI=EV/PV=157,000/180,000=0.875
Question 3:
You are managing a top-secret government project that has been progressing as planned. Suddenly, one of your team members informed you that the project had encountered an unexpected major problem that was not included in the risk register. What should be your first course of action?
Update the risk management plan
Create a fallback plan
Take corrective and preventive actions
Create a workaround
Update the risk management planCreate a fallback planTake corrective and preventive actionsCorrect answerCreate a workaroundOverall explanationSince the problem has occurred, the first thing you should do as a project manager is to address the risk by creating a workaround. Once the issue is addressed, you may need to reevaluate your risk identification process, look for unexpected effects of the problem, inform management, update the risk management plan, create a fallback plan, and take corrective and preventative actions.
Question 4:
You are the Project Manager of a large and complex project. Your project team has finished creating a work breakdown structure for the project. However, some of the team members are still not sure of the kind of work included in each of their work packages. Which of the following documents would you suggest they go through?
The Product Scope document
Project Management Plan
Work Break Structure (WBS) Dictionary
Project scope statement
The Product Scope documentProject Management PlanCorrect answerWork Break Structure (WBS) DictionaryProject scope statementOverall explanationA Work Break Structure (WBS) Dictionary accompanies a Work Breakdown Structure and provides a description of the work to be done for each WBS package. It provides more detailed descriptions of the WBS components, such as work descriptions, schedule milestones, schedule activities, resources required, cost estimates, quality requirements, acceptance criteria, etc.
Question 5:
When in the project’s life cycle, is the cost highest?
During planning
Midway through the project
During closure
At the initiating phase
During planningCorrect answerMidway through the projectDuring closureAt the initiating phaseOverall explanationProject cost peaks in the middle of the project as maximum resources are utilized during this phase. The project’s cost is low at the beginning, peaks midway, and drops rapidly as the project draws to an end. Initiating, planning, and closing are not part of the project life cycle and are process groups.
Question 6:
You are monitoring the status of a project to update the project progress and manage changes to the schedule baseline. You have some resources assigned to more than one activity simultaneously, making them over-allocated during those days. You want to reduce this overallocation and keep resource usage at a constant level. What technique should you use to achieve this goal?
Resource Compression
Resource DeAllocation
Schedule Compression
Resource Leveling
Resource CompressionResource DeAllocationSchedule CompressionCorrect answerResource LevelingOverall explanationResource leveling is used to reduce overallocation and to keep resource usage at a constant level. This technique can be used in both the “Develop Schedule” process and the “Control Schedule” process.
Question 7:
You identified a risk in your project that is difficult for you to manage. Therefore, you gave the responsibility of managing this risk to an outside source. What kind of risk response strategy is this?
Accept
Transfer
Exploit
Avoid
AcceptCorrect answerTransferExploitAvoidOverall explanationIn a transfer risk response strategy, you transfer the ownership of risk to a third party. Now it is their responsibility to manage the risk once it happens. Insurance is an example of a risk transfer strategy. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 443.
Question 8:
Your organization commits to providing certain resources during the discussions with the customer buyer, although resource planning has not been initiated as the contracting process has just begun. What is this known as?
External hire
Pre-assignment
Virtual team assignment
Confirmed team assignment
External hireCorrect answerPre-assignmentVirtual team assignmentConfirmed team assignmentOverall explanationPre-assignment is the early assignment of resources to a project, usually used in competitive bidding and in special expertise projects. When physical or team resources for a project are determined in advance, they are considered pre-assigned. This situation can occur if the project is the result of specific resources being identified as part of a competitive proposal or if the project is dependent upon the expertise of particular people. Pre-assignment might also include the team members who have already been assigned in Develop Project Charter Process or other processes before the initial Resource Management Plan has been completed. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 333.
Question 9:
You are the project manager of a highly visible and critical project in your company. Your project sponsor has a great deal of authority regarding project decisions, but you recently discovered that he doesn’t have much interest in your project. To complete the project successfully, you need your project sponsor’s continuous support. What stakeholder management strategy should you use with your project sponsor?
Monitor the sponsor’s actions
Keep the sponsor satisfied
Manage the sponsor closely
Keep the sponsor informed
Monitor the sponsor’s actionsCorrect answerKeep the sponsor satisfiedManage the sponsor closelyKeep the sponsor informedOverall explanationA power/interest grid is a classification model used for stakeholder analysis and management that groups the stakeholders based on their level of authority (power) and their level of concern (interest) regarding project outcomes. The classification and recommended management strategies are as follows: Low-power/low-interest: monitor only. Low-power/high-interest: keep informed. High-power/low-interest: keep satisfied. High-power/high-interest: manage closely. Based on this scenario, the sponsor can be classified as high-power and low-interest. Therefore, the correct answer is to keep the sponsor satisfied.
Question 10:
Quality reports are generated in which process?
Plan Quality Management
Manage Quality
Validate Scope
Control Quality
Plan Quality ManagementCorrect answerManage QualityValidate ScopeControl QualityOverall explanationQuality reports summarize quality issues, recommendations, corrective actions, and quality control findings.
Question 11:
The project team inspected a random sample of their products. The resulting control chart showed that any process variance was within acceptable limits. The project team, in this way, verified their deliverables. Which of the following processes would take these verified deliverables as an input and generate accepted deliverables as an output?
Collect Requirements
Validate Scope
Control Scope
Control Quality
Collect RequirementsCorrect answerValidate ScopeControl ScopeControl QualityOverall explanationValidate Scope is the process where the customer or sponsor reviews verified deliverables (from the Control Quality process). If the deliverables are found to be satisfactory, the customer or sponsor formally accepts them. In this way, the Validate Scope process has accepted deliverables as an output.
Question 12:
You are the project manager for an infrastructure development project. An unidentified stakeholder is not happy with your project’s performance. He has asked for some updates to be performed on the project. As a project manager, what should you do next?
Analyze the impact of the request on the project
Implement the change
Issue a change request to change control board (CCB)
Update stakeholder register
Analyze the impact of the request on the projectImplement the changeIssue a change request to change control board (CCB)Correct answerUpdate stakeholder registerOverall explanationKeyword (Unidentified stakeholder). You should first update the stakeholder register, to identify the stakeholder then proceed further with the other processes.
Question 13:
You are a project manager, managing a project for the company. A company’s financial year-end is approaching. A seller delivers most of a project’s deliverables, but a few defects require correction before the contracted payment can be made. What should the project manager do?
Pay to the seller with a formal written commitment to complete the work
Claim penalties for the value of the outstanding payment.
Arrange an extended financial project close until contract closure is completed
Terminate seller contract
Correct answerPay to the seller with a formal written commitment to complete the workClaim penalties for the value of the outstanding payment.Arrange an extended financial project close until contract closure is completedTerminate seller contractOverall explanationA company’s financial year-end is approaching, so the project manager should pay the seller with a formal written commitment to complete the work.
Question 14:
Which of the following information sources is used during the Control Scope process as a comparison to actual results to determine if a change, corrective action, or preventive action is necessary to be implemented?
Requirements Documentation
Requirements Traceability Matrix
Scope Baseline
Work Performance Data
Requirements DocumentationRequirements Traceability MatrixCorrect answerScope BaselineWork Performance DataOverall explanationThe Scope Baseline represents the planned results of the project in terms of scope and is compared to actual results to determine if a change, corrective action, or preventive action is necessary to be implemented. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 169.
Question 15:
In your systems development project, you noted during a review that the system had less functionality than planned at the critical design review. For example, too many defects were identified. This finding suggests that during the “Monitor Risks” process you should use one of the following tools and techniques:
Risk Audit
Reserve analysis
Risk reassessment
Technical performance analysis
Risk AuditReserve analysisRisk reassessmentCorrect answerTechnical performance analysisOverall explanationTechnical performance analysis is a data analysis tool and technique in “Monitor Risks”. Its purpose is to compare technical performance to the schedule of technical achievement. It requires the definition of objective, quantifiable measures of technical performance to help compare actual results against targets. Examples of these measures are weight, transaction times, number of delivered defects, or storage capacity. The deviation can help indicate the possible impact of threats or opportunities. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 456.
Question 16:
In the closing phase, you noticed that your project team members documented only the reasons for success as lessons learned. What should you do next?
Escalate the problem to the PMO manager
Nothing to do
Meet the project team members and direct them to document both success and failures
The project team is right
Escalate the problem to the PMO managerNothing to doCorrect answerMeet the project team members and direct them to document both success and failuresThe project team is rightOverall explanationAt the end of your project, the project team should document both the success and failure reasons as lessons learned to be used in future projects.
Question 17:
A project manager is currently in the process of determining, documenting, and managing stakeholder needs and requirements. Due to the sensitive nature of the project, there is a concern that some stakeholders will not provide candid feedback unless confidentiality is maintained. What is the project manager’s best course of action?
Hold a focus group to learn about stakeholder expectations and attitudes about the project
Conduct interviews to elicit information from stakeholders by talking to them directly
Use multicriteria decision analysis to provide a systematic analytical approach for establishing criteria
Use brainstorming to generate and collect multiple ideas related to project requirements
Hold a focus group to learn about stakeholder expectations and attitudes about the projectCorrect answerConduct interviews to elicit information from stakeholders by talking to them directlyUse multicriteria decision analysis to provide a systematic analytical approach for establishing criteriaUse brainstorming to generate and collect multiple ideas related to project requirementsOverall explanationThe question suggests that the project manager is performing the collect requirements process, which is the process of determining, documenting, and managing stakeholder needs and requirements to meet project objectives. In support of this process, the project manager will need to employ data gathering techniques to elicit feedback from the stakeholders to determine their needs and requirements. The question suggests that the project manager needs to use a data-gathering technique where the responses will remain confidential. An interview is a formal or informal approach to eliciting information from stakeholders by talking to them directly. Of the available choices, conducting interviews is the best tool for the project manager to use to obtain confidential information. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 142.
Question 18:
During the collection of stakeholder requirements, a disagreement between two key stakeholders delayed the sponsor’s approval of the project charter. What should the project manager do?
Conduct a benefits analysis with relevant stakeholders.
Escalate the issue to the project sponsor.
Remove all conflicting requirements.
Use conflict resolution techniques.
Conduct a benefits analysis with relevant stakeholders.Escalate the issue to the project sponsor.Remove all conflicting requirements.Correct answerUse conflict resolution techniques.Overall explanationConflict management can be used to help bring stakeholders into alignment on the objectives, success criteria, high-level requirements, project description, summary milestones, and other elements of the charter. So the project manager should use conflict resolution techniques to handle the situation and get the approval of the project charter from the sponsor. Remember that conflict management is a tool and technique in developing the project charter process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 80.
Question 19:
A change request by a key stakeholder has been rejected by the change control board. What is the next action the project manager needs to take?
Document the result of the change request in the change log.
Tell the stakeholder better luck next time.
Ask the change control board for the reason why the change was rejected.
Advise the change control board to document the approval process before the next meeting.
Correct answerDocument the result of the change request in the change log.Tell the stakeholder better luck next time.Ask the change control board for the reason why the change was rejected.Advise the change control board to document the approval process before the next meeting.Overall explanationThe project manager needs to document the result of the change request. This way, if the issue comes up again, there is already documentation on the request and why it was rejected. The change log is used as a comprehensive list of all changes submitted during the project and lists their current status.
Question 20:
What is servant leadership about?
It is about the practice of leading through service to the team.
It is about empowering followers through idealized attributes and behaviors.
It is about the project team promoting an agile mindset.
It is about the project manager being able to inspire and be enthusiastic.
Correct answerIt is about the practice of leading through service to the team.It is about empowering followers through idealized attributes and behaviors.It is about the project team promoting an agile mindset.It is about the project manager being able to inspire and be enthusiastic.Overall explanationEmpowering followers through idealized attributes and behaviors is focused on empowering followers through idealized attributes and behaviors. On the other hand, a charismatic leadership position is about being able to inspire, being high-energy, enthusiastic, and self-confident, and holding strong convictions. Agile approaches emphasize servant leadership as a way to empower teams. Servant leadership is the practice of leading through service to the team by focusing on understanding and addressing the needs and development of team members in order to enable the highest possible team performance. The role of a servant leader is to facilitate the team’s discovery and definition of agile. Servant leaders practice and radiate agility. Agile Practice Guide, Page 33.
Question 21:
You are a new project manager who has recently been assigned to the executing phase of a project. You discovered that there was no RAM for the project. Which document do you refer to find who is responsible for implementing a certain work package?
Stakeholder Register
Resource Calender
WBS Dictionary
WBS
Stakeholder RegisterResource CalenderCorrect answerWBS DictionaryWBSOverall explanationThe WBS dictionary is a document that provides detailed deliverable, activity, and scheduling information about each component in the WBS. The WBS dictionary is a document that supports the WBS. Most of the information included in the WBS dictionary is created by other processes and added to this document at a later stage. Information in the WBS dictionary may include but is not limited to: code of account identifier, work description, assumptions and constraints, responsible organization or individual who is responsible for implementing the work package. schedule milestones, WBS associated schedule activities, resources required, cost estimates, quality requirements, acceptance criteria, technical references, and agreement information. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 162.
Question 22:
The project is nearing completion when a previously unidentified risk is discovered. As a project manager, what should you do next?
Update the Risk Register
Update the Risk response Plan
Update the Issue log
Update the Risk Management Plan
Correct answerUpdate the Risk RegisterUpdate the Risk response PlanUpdate the Issue logUpdate the Risk Management PlanOverall explanationSince the unidentified risk was discovered (not occured) during the project, the first step is to update the Risk Register.
Question 23:
What is the correct sequence for these tools and techniques used in Project Schedule Management?
Decomposition, Alternatives analysis, Variance analysis, and Three-point estimates
Decomposition work packages into activities, Three-Point Estimates, and Schedule Task
Variance analysis, Three-point estimates, Dependency determination, and Decomposition
Dependency determination, Decomposition, Bottom-up estimating, and Resource leveling
Decomposition, Alternatives analysis, Variance analysis, and Three-point estimatesCorrect answerDecomposition work packages into activities, Three-Point Estimates, and Schedule TaskVariance analysis, Three-point estimates, Dependency determination, and DecompositionDependency determination, Decomposition, Bottom-up estimating, and Resource levelingOverall explanationDecomposition work packages into activities = Define activity & Three-point estimates= estimate activity Duration & schedule task = Develop schedule.
Question 24:
During a project meeting with the customer, the performing organization mentioned that the customer’s predefined budget allocation must be addressed. Where did the project manager find this information?
Project assumptions.
Project exclusion.
Project constraints.
Project deliverables.
Project assumptions.Project exclusion.Correct answerProject constraints.Project deliverables.Overall explanationKeyword (predefined budget) The predefined budget allocation by the customer that needs to be addressed is an example of project constraints.
Question 25:
What is the most essential practice in agile to help the team learn from previous work on the product and its process?
Iteration
Typing
Rebasing
Retrospective
IterationTypingRebasingCorrect answerRetrospectiveOverall explanationThe single most important practice is the retrospective, because it allows the team to learn about, improve, and adapt its process. Retrospectives help the team learn from its previous work on the product and its process. One of the principles behind the Agile Manifesto is that “At regular intervals, the team reflects on how to become more effective, then tunes and adjusts its behavior accordingly.” Agile Practice Guide, Page 50.
Question 26:
During a risk review meeting, the team identified a risk. The project manager was unable to determine a way to manage the risk internally because it was in the domain of another project team. What should the project manager do?
Transfer the risk to another team
Accept the risk
Mitigate the risk
Escalate the risk to senior management
Transfer the risk to another teamAccept the riskMitigate the riskCorrect answerEscalate the risk to senior managementOverall explanationKeyword (The risk is in the domain of another project team). Escalation is appropriate when the project team or the project sponsor agrees that a threat is outside the scope of the project or that the proposed response would exceed the project manager’s authority. Escalated risks are managed at the program level, portfolio level, or another relevant part of the organization and not at the project level. The project manager determines who should be notified about the threat and communicates the details to that person or part of the organization. It is important that ownership of escalated threats is accepted by the relevant party in the organization. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 442.
Question 27:
Which of the following techniques helps project managers assess team members’ preferences, aspirations, how they make decisions, and how they interact with people and can provide improved understanding, trust, commitment, and communication among team members?
Project management information system
Conflict Management
Recognizing and Rewarding
Individual and team assessment
Project management information systemConflict ManagementRecognizing and RewardingCorrect answerIndividual and team assessmentOverall explanationIndividual, and team assessment tools help project managers assess team members’ preferences, aspirations, how they process and organize information, how they make decisions, and how they interact with people. Various tools are available, such as attitudinal surveys, specific assessments, structured interviews, ability tests, and focus groups. These tools can provide improved understanding, trust, commitment, and communication among team members and can facilitate more productive teams throughout the project. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 342.
Question 28:
During the implementation phase, you want to compare the baseline to the actual results and determine if the variance is within the threshold amount or if corrective or preventive action is appropriate. Which of the following techniques can help you?
Trend analysis
Variance Analysis
Decomposition
Control chart
Trend analysisCorrect answerVariance AnalysisDecompositionControl chartOverall explanationVariance analysis is used to compare the baseline to the actual results and determine if the variance is within the threshold amount or if corrective or preventive action is appropriate. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 170.
Question 29:
A project manager must evaluate and simulate the impact of a list of risks for the project duration. What should the project manager do?
Prepare a contingency and fallback plan
Perform a schedule network analysis
Conduct a what-if scenario analysis
Perform an expected monetary value (EMV) Analysis
Prepare a contingency and fallback planPerform a schedule network analysisCorrect answerConduct a what-if scenario analysisPerform an expected monetary value (EMV) AnalysisOverall explanationKeyword (evaluate and simulate). What-if scenario analysis is the process of evaluating scenarios in order to predict their effect, positive or negative, on project objectives. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 213.
Question 30:
Which of the following techniques are used to create and connect people to information and are effective for sharing simple, unambiguous, codified explicit knowledge?
Benchmarking
Multi-criteria decision analysis
Information Management
Focus groups
BenchmarkingMulti-criteria decision analysisCorrect answerInformation ManagementFocus groupsOverall explanationInformation management tools and techniques are used to create and connect people to information. They are effective for sharing simple, unambiguous, codified, explicit knowledge. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 103.
Question 31:
You have asked your delegate to create an assumptions log draft, which you wish to finalize, and then create the lessons learned register. When were these documents created?
Both are created when developing the project charter
These are created while developing the project charter and managing project knowledge respectively
Both are created when executing the work that is in the Direct and Manage Work process
The assumptions log is created while developing the project charter and the lessons learned register in the Monitor and Control Project Work
Both are created when developing the project charterCorrect answerThese are created while developing the project charter and managing project knowledge respectivelyBoth are created when executing the work that is in the Direct and Manage Work processThe assumptions log is created while developing the project charter and the lessons learned register in the Monitor and Control Project WorkOverall explanationThe assumptions log is created at the time of project charter creation, and the lessons learned register when managing project knowledge.
Question 32:
During the execution of the project, you had to manage a change request where the sponsor was off the board. You evaluated the impact of the change on the other constraints of the project, then you got the change request approved by the CCB. What is the next step the project manager should take?
Implement the change.
Update Project management plan.
Ask the sponsor for authorization.
Review the approved change with the team.
Implement the change.Update Project management plan.Correct answerAsk the sponsor for authorization.Review the approved change with the team.Overall explanationIt is a tricky question. Customer or sponsor approval may be required for certain change requests after CCB approval unless they are part of the CCB. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 115.
Question 33:
Your team has created a project-related blog site that allows non-project readers to comment on articles written by project staff. Which method of communication is being used in this scenario?
Small Communication
Pull Communication
Interactive Communication
Push Communication
Small CommunicationPull CommunicationInteractive CommunicationCorrect answerPush CommunicationOverall explanationA blog is a push method of communication where the writer expresses himself/herself irrespective of whether the reader has asked for or is interested in it or not. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 374.
Question 34:
Henry has been managing a library construction project. Some key stakeholders have recently asked for changes, and an initial quick and cursory analysis shows that the changes will add more cost to the project. What should be his next step?
Communicate the change to management to get their input
Implement the change request and communicate to the customer
Estimate the impact of the change on schedule, cost, and quality
Get approval from Change Control Board
Communicate the change to management to get their inputImplement the change request and communicate to the customerCorrect answerEstimate the impact of the change on schedule, cost, and qualityGet approval from Change Control BoardOverall explanationThe first step in processing any change request is to fully analyze and understand its impact on the project. Since Henry has only done an “initial and quick” analysis, he has to do a more in-depth analysis. For example, an assessment of priority level and an impact assessment (e.g., estimated impact on the budget, work effort, and schedule) are often included in a change request so that the Change Control Board (CCB) can make a more informed decision. It is then possible to get further input from others when putting together the change request. Once completed, the change request is submitted to the CCB for approval, and only then is the change implemented and communicated with the customer.
Question 35:
Internal restructuring by the customer has resulted in the replacement of some key stakeholders. What should the project manager do first?
Hold another kick-off meeting with the new stakeholders to re-establish the project baseline.
Review and update the stakeholder engagement plan.
Distribute a summary of the project’s current status to the new stakeholders.
Review and execute the communication management plan.
Hold another kick-off meeting with the new stakeholders to re-establish the project baseline.Correct answerReview and update the stakeholder engagement plan.Distribute a summary of the project’s current status to the new stakeholders.Review and execute the communication management plan.Overall explanationAs a result of the replacement of some key stakeholders, the project manager should review and update the stakeholder engagement plan. The stakeholder engagement plan is updated regularly to reflect changes in the stakeholder community. Typical trigger situations requiring updates to the plan include: when there are changes to the organization structure or within the industry, and when new individuals or groups become stakeholders, current stakeholders are no longer part of the stakeholder community, or the importance of particular stakeholders to the project’s success changes. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 518.
Question 36:
A portfolio manager informed the project manager that their project was terminated. The project manager wants to inform the stakeholders and team members about this. To what document should the project manager refer?
Resources Management Plan
Communication management plan
Change Management Plan
Responsibility assignments matrix (RAM)
Resources Management PlanCorrect answerCommunication management planChange Management PlanResponsibility assignments matrix (RAM)Overall explanationKeyword (inform). The project manager should refer to the communication management plan to inform the stakeholders and team members about the termination decision. Because the communication management plan specifies who, when, and why the information should be sent.
Question 37:
During project cost discussions, there were various opinions regarding which process creates cost forecasts. Some are of the opinion that this happens in “Estimate Costs” and some in “Determine Budget”. What is your opinion?
Estimate costs
Control Costs
Create cost baseline
Determine budget
Estimate costsCorrect answerControl CostsCreate cost baselineDetermine budgetOverall explanationCost forecasts are developed in the Control Costs process.
Question 38:
You are working on a project as a project manager. Your vendor selection process took more than the anticipated amount of time. However, now that everything is completed, and the vendor is on board, a few weeks later, the vendor notified you that his resources had left and that he lacked the necessary team to complete the project. What should you do next?
Cancel the contract and select the second-best vendor
Tell the vendor to continue the work until they find a replacement
Tell the vendor to analyze the impact of this on the project
Make a decision as per the contract
Cancel the contract and select the second-best vendorTell the vendor to continue the work until they find a replacementTell the vendor to analyze the impact of this on the projectCorrect answerMake a decision as per the contractOverall explanationIt is always better to make the decision as per the contract because it includes the general terms and conditions, termination clause and alternative dispute resolution mechanisms, and subordinate subcontractor approvals. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 489.
Question 39:
After identifying the stakeholders, you performed stakeholder analysis and started to compare it with stakeholder analysis done in other projects and also by other organizations. What is this called?
Comparative stakeholder analysis
Monitoring stakeholder engagements
Expert judgment
Benchmarking
Comparative stakeholder analysisMonitoring stakeholder engagementsExpert judgmentCorrect answerBenchmarkingOverall explanationIn benchmarking, the comparison is made with best-in-class approaches within and outside the organization. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 520.
Question 40:
Tom is a project manager who is assigned to a foreign country to manage a project. The project is a large one and comprises smaller sub-teams contributing to the entire project. As part of rewards and recognition within the project, Tom plans a team award for the best sub-team. Recognition and rewards are associated with which of the following processes?
Manage Team
Close Project or Phase
Control Quality
Develop Team
Manage TeamClose Project or PhaseControl QualityCorrect answerDevelop TeamOverall explanationRecognition and Rewards is a tool of the Develop Team process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 341.
Question 41:
A seller has performed all the work as per the contract, but the buyer stated that the seller’s performance is not within the allowed range of values for one of the buyer’s internal metrics. The buyer decided to deduct part of the payment to the seller. As per the contract, what is the buyer allowed to do?
The buyer must pay the seller for the work performed
The seller should complete the work again to meet the buyer’s internal metric value range
The buyer should go to the court else the seller may sue them for non-payment
The buyer is allowed to deduct a small sum from the payment to the seller due to non-compliance with the buyer’s internal metric value range
Correct answerThe buyer must pay the seller for the work performedThe seller should complete the work again to meet the buyer’s internal metric value rangeThe buyer should go to the court else the seller may sue them for non-paymentThe buyer is allowed to deduct a small sum from the payment to the seller due to non-compliance with the buyer’s internal metric value rangeOverall explanationThe buyer must pay the seller as work has been performed as per the contract. Any internal metrics not appearing in the contract cannot be used for justifying non-payment reasons. It is too early to go to court.
Question 42:
A project is six months into its nine-month projected duration, and the project manager is reporting that the project is at least three months behind schedule because certain key stakeholders were resistant to any changes that might occur as an outcome of the project. What might have been done differently during project planning to have avoided this situation?
Establishment of a more robust communications management plan
Development of a stakeholder engagement assessment matrix
Better execution of the Manage Stakeholder Engagement process
Creation of a comprehensive stakeholder register
Establishment of a more robust communications management planCorrect answerDevelopment of a stakeholder engagement assessment matrixBetter execution of the Manage Stakeholder Engagement processCreation of a comprehensive stakeholder registerOverall explanationThe scenario describes a situation where the resistance of certain key stakeholders has caused the project to run behind schedule and asks what might have been done differently during project planning. Two of the answer choices represent activities that are not associated with the Planning Process Group, and, as a result, those responses can be eliminated. Both of the remaining answer choices represent plausible actions that may have led to better stakeholder engagement. The actual PMP exam may present questions with more than one correct answer, and you must select the ‘best’ answer among the potentially correct options. In this case, the development of the stakeholder engagement assessment matrix directly addresses the issue described in the question. The stakeholder engagement assessment matrix is used as a tool during the “Plan Stakeholder Engagement” process and identifies key stakeholders along with their current and desired engagement levels. Classifications for stakeholder engagement may include: unaware, resistant, neutral, supportive, and leading. In this scenario, certain key stakeholders were resistant to the project, which caused the project to run behind schedule. A stakeholder engagement assessment matrix is the best tool for identifying resistant stakeholders with enough influence to undermine a project. In this case, identifying the current and desired engagement levels of the key stakeholders might have allowed the project manager to take action to address the undesirable engagement levels and prevent the stakeholder’s resistance from negatively impacting the project’s performance. Therefore, of the available options, the development of a stakeholder engagement assessment matrix is the best answer to the question asked.
Question 43:
The critical activities of the project have been estimated for their durations, but the risks associated with them have not been factored in yet. The risks listed in the risk register are then reviewed and additional durations are factored in for activities that could be prone to those risks. What type of reserve has been applied?
Contingency reserve
Estimation budget
Alternative reserve
Management reserve
Correct answerContingency reserveEstimation budgetAlternative reserveManagement reserveOverall explanationAdditional duration factored in due to possible risks is known as contingency reserves. These may be applied to cost estimates also. The management reserve is for unknown risks. The terms alternative reserve and estimation bucket are not valid.
Question 44:
A project manager is discussing with the project management office the implementation of risk audits in the project. What should be the purpose of a risk audit?
A risk audit gives the opportunity to consider the effectiveness of the risk management response strategy
A risk audit gives the opportunity to verify the completeness of the risk register and risk report
A risk audit gives the opportunity to validate the existence of a risk management plan
A risk audit gives the opportunity to consider the effectiveness of the entire risk management process
A risk audit gives the opportunity to consider the effectiveness of the risk management response strategyA risk audit gives the opportunity to verify the completeness of the risk register and risk reportA risk audit gives the opportunity to validate the existence of a risk management planCorrect answerA risk audit gives the opportunity to consider the effectiveness of the entire risk management processOverall explanationRisk audits are a type of audit that may be used to consider the effectiveness of the risk management process. The project manager is responsible for ensuring that risk audits are performed at an appropriate frequency, as defined in the project’s risk management plan. Risk audits may be included during routine project review meetings or may form part of a risk review meeting, or the team may choose to hold separate risk audit meetings. The format for the risk audit and its objectives should be clearly defined before the audit is conducted. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 456.
Question 45:
After several iterations, your team has unclear work assignments. How would you tackle this problem?
Consider Kanban boards to see the flow of work.
A servant leader can help in this situation.
Help sponsors and stakeholders craft a product vision.
Consider the technical practices that work for the environment.
Correct answerConsider Kanban boards to see the flow of work.A servant leader can help in this situation.Help sponsors and stakeholders craft a product vision.Consider the technical practices that work for the environment.Overall explanationA servant leader can help clear the obstacles when they struggle with obstacles. In that situation, they could consider a coach. When there are unclear work assignments, you would need to help the team learn to self-manage their work. Consider Kanban boards to see the flow of work. Consider a daily standup to walk the board and see what work is there. Agile Practice Guide, Page 58.
Question 46:
You are responsible for the complete makeover of a shopping mall, which involves civil work and painting. After going through the details, you came up with the cost estimates that have been approved to arrive at the cost baseline. Work is now in progress, and you and senior management are happy with the work. Suddenly, you realized the ceiling repair work was not factored in the estimates, though it was part of the scope. You decided to make use of the contingency reserves, but your senior manager advised you to make use of the management reserve. What is the correct action?
Escalate the issue to the project sponsor
Making use of Contingency Reserve
Making use of Management Reserve
Making use of both the Management Reserve and the Contingency Reserve
Escalate the issue to the project sponsorMaking use of Contingency ReserveCorrect answerMaking use of Management ReserveMaking use of both the Management Reserve and the Contingency ReserveOverall explanationThe management reserve is meant for unknown unknowns and is part of the scope of the project. The question clearly states that the work is in scope. Contingency reserves are for known unknowns, which is not the case here. The correct answer is “management reserve.”
Question 47:
Your company won a new project in a country where it is the first time doing a project. You got information that a few companies are running similar projects in this country, but the government is not satisfied with their quality. As a project manager, what should you do before starting your project?
Follow your company’s Enterprise Environmental factors.
Hold a meeting with one project manager from the mentioned companies to know what the problem with the quality is.
Put a management quality plan together with your team.
Hold a meeting with a governmental representative to get more information about the required quality
Follow your company’s Enterprise Environmental factors.Hold a meeting with one project manager from the mentioned companies to know what the problem with the quality is.Put a management quality plan together with your team.Correct answerHold a meeting with a governmental representative to get more information about the required qualityOverall explanationBecause the project is external, you should follow the law, procedures, and instructions of this country.
Question 48:
During the implementation phase, the project manager identifies a new project activity that will not affect the project end date. What should the project manager do next?
Create a change request
Update the schedule baseline and Begin working on the new task immediately
Update the change log and update the schedule baseline
Ask the sponsor to approve the new activity
Correct answerCreate a change requestUpdate the schedule baseline and Begin working on the new task immediatelyUpdate the change log and update the schedule baselineAsk the sponsor to approve the new activityOverall explanationAlthough the new project activity does not affect the end date of the project, it may affect the scope baseline and the other project constraints. Therefore, the project manager should submit the change request first and get approval from CCB.
Question 49:
You are managing a project with a budget of $9,000, and $1,500 has been spent. However, you only completed $1,000 worth of work. Your schedule says that you should have completed 50% of the work. What is the estimate at completion (EAC)?
$9,000 (Based on the original project Budget)
$9000 (Based on performance data)
$13,500 (Based on the original project Budget)
$13,500 (Based on performance data)
$9,000 (Based on the original project Budget)$9000 (Based on performance data)$13,500 (Based on the original project Budget)Correct answer$13,500 (Based on performance data)Overall explanationThe most common formula for EAC is BAC/CPI. CPI=EV/AC =$1,000/$1,500= 0.66 So, EAC= $9,000/0.66 =$13,500
Question 50:
Which of the following helps to determine which risks have the most potential impact on a project?
Root Cause Analysis
Cost-Benefit Analysis
Sensitivity Analysis
SWOT Analysis
Root Cause AnalysisCost-Benefit AnalysisCorrect answerSensitivity AnalysisSWOT AnalysisOverall explanationSensitivity Analysis helps to determine which risks have the most potential impact on the project. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 434.
Question 51:
You are currently engaged in the Direct and Manage Project Work process and you are performing an activity that realigns the performance of the project work with the project management plan. What is the name of this activity?
Preventive Action
Defect Repair
Corrective Action
Work Performance Measurements
Preventive ActionDefect RepairCorrect answerCorrective ActionWork Performance MeasurementsOverall explanationChange requests document preventive and corrective actions. Corrective action is an activity that realigns the performance of the project work with the project management plan.
Question 52:
Which technique should you use to reduce the number of quality inspections and lower the cost of quality control for your project?
Statistical Sampling
Pareto Chart
Defect Repair Review
Histogram
Correct answerStatistical SamplingPareto ChartDefect Repair ReviewHistogramOverall explanationStatistical sampling will provide sufficient inspection to ensure a high likelihood of a quality product while saving money for the project. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 303.
Question 53:
A project is contracted on a Cost-Plus-Fixed-Fee (CPFF) basis with a fixed fee of US $5,000. The estimated cost is $50,000. If the project comes in at $60,000 with no changes in project scope, what would be the total cost of the contract?
$65,000
$75,000
$55,000
$80,000
Correct answer$65,000$75,000$55,000$80,000Overall explanationIn a Cost-Plus-Fixed-Fee (CPFF) type of contract, the seller is reimbursed for allowable costs and receives a fixed fee payment calculated as a percentage of the estimated project costs. The fixed fee does not vary with actual costs unless the project scope changes. In the current scenario, the fixed fee is $5,000. Although the actual project comes in at $60,000, the fixed fee remains the same. Hence, the total cost of the contract will be $60,000 + $5,000 = $65,000. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 472.
Question 54:
Your project is going well; it is ahead of schedule, under budget, and approaching the closing phase. One of the very vital technical members has been transferred to another project outside of the organization, and one of the team members told you that he could do his tasks and complete the work. What should you do next?
Evaluate the impact with the team members.
Negotiate with the functional manager to assign a new member.
Assign another member to take his duties.
Do nothing; the project is near completion.
Correct answerEvaluate the impact with the team members.Negotiate with the functional manager to assign a new member.Assign another member to take his duties.Do nothing; the project is near completion.Overall explanationAlthough one of the team members told you that he could do his job and complete the project without him, the first step you should take is to evaluate the impact with the other team members because he is one of the very vital technical members transferred to other projects.
Question 55:
You found some difference or variance between the funds available and the planned expenditures over the duration of the project, with the latter being higher than the former for certain time periods. What must be done first to address this issue?
Use a portion of the change budget to provide this extra funding as there is a difference between the plan and funds available
Transfer funds from other time periods to the periods where the planned expenditures are higher
Reschedule certain activities if possible so that the rate of expenditures can be leveled to the available funding
Use a portion of the risk budget to provide this extra funding as there is a risk of not completing the activities for that time period due to a lack of funds
Use a portion of the change budget to provide this extra funding as there is a difference between the plan and funds availableTransfer funds from other time periods to the periods where the planned expenditures are higherCorrect answerReschedule certain activities if possible so that the rate of expenditures can be leveled to the available fundingUse a portion of the risk budget to provide this extra funding as there is a risk of not completing the activities for that time period due to a lack of fundsOverall explanationThis approach is called “funding limit reconciliation.” The expenditure of funds should be reconciled with any funding limits on the commitment of funds for the project. A variance between the funding limits and the planned expenditures will sometimes necessitate the rescheduling of work to level out the rate of expenditures. This is accomplished by placing imposed date constraints on work into the project schedule. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 253.
Question 56:
After developing the project management plan, the project manager schedules a meeting with key stakeholders. What part of the project will this complete?
Planning
Initiation
Execution
Monitoring
Correct answerPlanningInitiationExecutionMonitoringOverall explanationAfter developing the project management plan, the next step is conducting the project kick-off meeting. The project kick-off meeting is usually associated with the end of planning, and the next process is the executing phase. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 86.
Question 57:
Based on the following table, which of the following activities will be within the budget and behind schedule?
Activity D
Activity A
Activity C
Activity B
Activity DCorrect answerActivity AActivity CActivity BOverall explanationTo solve this question, you should calculate the CV and SV for all activities: Activity A: CV=EV-AC (7000-7000 = 0) & SV= EV-PV (7000-8000 = -1000), so the project is within budget and behind schedule. Activity B: CV=EV-AC (10,000-9000 = 1000) & SV= EV-PV (10,000-9000 = 1000), so the project is under budget and ahead of schedule. Activity C: CV=EV-AC (9,000 - 8500 = 500) & SV= EV-PV (9,000 - 8000 = 1000), so the project is under budget and ahead of schedule. Activity D: CV=EV-AC (8,000 - 11,000 = -3000) & SV= EV-PV (8,000 - 11000 = -3000), so the project is over budget and behind schedule. So the Correct answer is Activity A.
Question 58:
A drug manufacturer is testing samples of medicines for their designed dosage during clinical trials. In which process will the sample sizes be defined and in which process will the testing be carried out?
Plan Quality Management, Control Quality
Plan Quality Management, Quality Assurance
Plan Quality Management, Manage Quality
Manage Quality, Control Quality
Correct answerPlan Quality Management, Control QualityPlan Quality Management, Quality AssurancePlan Quality Management, Manage QualityManage Quality, Control QualityOverall explanationThe sample sizes will be defined during quality planning and the tests will be carried out in quality control.
Question 59:
A quality assurance subject matter expert (SME) discovered that the formulation team didn’t follow compliance procedures while manufacturing a drug. What should the project manager have done to prevent this issue?
Reviewed the quality management plan.
Reviewed the quality metrics document.
Reviewed the quality improvement method.
Reviewed the quality baseline document.
Correct answerReviewed the quality management plan.Reviewed the quality metrics document.Reviewed the quality improvement method.Reviewed the quality baseline document.Overall explanationThe formulation team didn’t follow compliance procedures while manufacturing a drug. The project manager should have reviewed the quality management plan because it includes the major procedures relevant to the project, such as dealing with the nonconformance, corrective action procedures, and continuous improvement procedures. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 286.
Question 60:
You have successfully completed a project. You have now been assigned a project that is midway through its execution. You have had to take up this project due to the non-availability of the current project manager. This is a complex project involving multiple contractors and teams at various geographical locations. You decided to look up the requirements for the types of reports and the frequency of sending them. Where would you find this information?
Communications Management Plan
Scope Management Plan
Stakholder Management Plan
Stakeholder Analysis
Correct answerCommunications Management PlanScope Management PlanStakholder Management PlanStakeholder AnalysisOverall explanationThe correct answer is “communication management plan.” This plan provides information such as the frequency of communication, type of communication, and who is responsible for communication.
Question 61:
At the final stage of the project, the sponsor rejected the final product because, as he said, it didn’t meet the project goals. Which document will you review to convince him?
Project charter
Agreement
Project management plan
Stakeholder Register
Correct answerProject charterAgreementProject management planStakeholder RegisterOverall explanationkeyword (Project Goals). The project goals are a component of the project charter. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 81
Question 62:
The employee responsible for completing a work package suddenly left the company. The project manager entered this in the issue log and discovered that the work package is on the critical path. How should the project manager handle this issue?
Hire a replacement resource.
Approve overtime to complete it.
Use the schedule reserves.
Fast track the project.
Correct answerHire a replacement resource.Approve overtime to complete it.Use the schedule reserves.Fast track the project.Overall explanationSince the work package is on the critical path and the employee responsible for completing it suddenly leaves the company, the project manager should hire a replacement resource as the best solution to handle this issue.
Question 63:
Which of the following techniques is the most effective form of conflict resolution on a project?
Collaborating
Reconciling
Smoothing
Forcing
Correct answerCollaboratingReconcilingSmoothingForcingOverall explanationCollaborating (or problem-solving) is a conflict resolution technique that incorporates multiple viewpoints, requires a cooperative attitude and open dialogue, and typically leads to consensus and commitment concerning how to resolve the conflict.
Question 64:
You are running an IT project that is currently in the execution phase. Your project leader has some questions about project approval requirements (such as who decides if the project is successful and who signs off on the project’s completion). What would you tell your project leader?
Approval requirements are listed in the Project Charter
Approval requirements are decided by the sponsor at the end of each phase
Approval requirements are listed in the Scope Verification document
Approval requirements are decided by the project team
Correct answerApproval requirements are listed in the Project CharterApproval requirements are decided by the sponsor at the end of each phaseApproval requirements are listed in the Scope Verification documentApproval requirements are decided by the project teamOverall explanationProject approval requirements are listed in the Project Charter. Therefore, your team leader should refer to the Project Charter to learn about those requirements.
Question 65:
You are a project manager on a software project. A development team completed the project and planned to initiate the closure phase. However, one key stakeholder refused to sign off due to non-compliance with the agreed-upon deliverables. What should the project manager do to facilitate acceptance?
Record the noncompliance and initiate project closure.
Conduct a variance analysis to identify any deviation in the deliverables.
Provide a new statement of work (SOW) for the variation in the deliverables
Document the noncompliance and start the change management process.
Record the noncompliance and initiate project closure.Correct answerConduct a variance analysis to identify any deviation in the deliverables.Provide a new statement of work (SOW) for the variation in the deliverablesDocument the noncompliance and start the change management process.Overall explanationVariance analysis is a T & T in the close project or phase process. First, the project manager should conduct a variance analysis to identify any deviation in the deliverables by comparing what was initially planned with the end result. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 126.
Question 66:
You are managing a pharmaceutical research project. Your research officer informed you that you need to plan his research activity so that it finishes before the documentation begins. Other than that, he said it can start as late in the project as necessary. What is the relationship between the research activity and the documentation activity?
Finish-to-Finish
Start-to-Finish
Finish-to-Start
Start-to-Start
Finish-to-FinishStart-to-FinishCorrect answerFinish-to-StartStart-to-StartOverall explanationThe question contains a twist: “the activity can start as late as necessary.” If you don’t focus on this distraction, you will notice that it’s a simple finish to start relationship. Read the question again, even if you schedule the activity as late as possible, it doesn’t change the relationship.
Question 67:
Based on the below table, which of the following risks represents the greatest concern for the project?
Risk (E)
Risk (B)
Risk (A)
Risk(C) and Risk (D)
Risk (E)Correct answerRisk (B)Risk (A)Risk(C) and Risk (D)Overall explanationRisk A = 0.17= 0.7 Risk B = 0.212.5=2.5 Risk c= 0.45= 2 Risk D=0.54= 2 Risk E= 0.4*3= 1.2 So, Risk B is the greatest Risk = 2.5
Question 68:
Which of the following activities is the most important to perform to help manage a project meeting?
Limit the meeting to a specific length of time
Ensure that every attendee has a chance to speak
Create and follow an agenda
Follow up on action items
Limit the meeting to a specific length of timeEnsure that every attendee has a chance to speakCorrect answerCreate and follow an agendaFollow up on action itemsOverall explanationCreating and following an agenda is the most important activity you can perform when managing project meetings. The meeting agenda sets the tone, the length, and the format for how the meeting will be conducted. Using a formal agenda makes it easy to create meeting minutes and follow-up action items after the meeting. Ensuring that every attendee has a chance to speak may be important for some meetings, but not necessarily for all meetings. Limiting the meeting to a specific length of time, in general, is good practice and will help you end your meeting on time, but it is not as critical when compared to creating and following an agenda. At times, meetings may run over time for them to fulfill the agenda. Following up on action items is also important, but this occurs after the meeting itself.
Question 69:
Which of the below is the responsibility of both the sender and receiver of the message?
Ensuring that the information is received in its entirety
Ensuring the information being communicated is clear and complete
Ensuring that the communication is correctly understood
The transmission of the message
Ensuring that the information is received in its entiretyEnsuring the information being communicated is clear and completeCorrect answerEnsuring that the communication is correctly understoodThe transmission of the messageOverall explanationEnsuring that the communication is correctly understood is applicable to both sender and receiver.
Question 70:
A project manager is participating in studying the project contract and going through the narrative description of products and services to be supplied under the contract. He is also meeting with key stakeholders and subject matter experts to evaluate if the project is worth the required investment. Which of the following documents would be created as an output in this process?
The project statement of work
Project charter
Organizational process assets
Project management plan
The project statement of workCorrect answerProject charterOrganizational process assetsProject management planOverall explanationThe project manager is participating in the development of the project charter using the statement of work to understand the product requirements and descriptions. The output of this process is a project charter. Once approved, it formally initiates the project. A project charter documents the high-level project description and business needs of the project, along with the current understanding of the customer’s needs, risks, and the name of the sponsor.
Question 71:
You are managing a contract as part of your project. You have obtained the seller’s responses, selected a seller, and awarded a contract. Which of the following should you do next in project procurement management?
Make or buy analysis
Procurement performance reviews
Procurement contract award
Quality audits
Make or buy analysisCorrect answerProcurement performance reviewsProcurement contract awardQuality auditsOverall explanationYou are currently in the “Conduct Procurement” process. The next process in procurement management is the “Control Procurement” process. A procurement performance review is a tool in this process.
Question 72:
Some of your core team members are unable to perform as a team. You are concerned about this and have made a decision to improve their performance as one core unit. Which among the following would be most suited for this purpose?
Use communication technology like shared portals, audio/video conferencing, and email/chat
Check employee performance records of the core team members to determine how to facilitate collaboration among them
Allow them to work as a virtual team using the latest collaboration technology
Colocate the core team members
Use communication technology like shared portals, audio/video conferencing, and email/chatCheck employee performance records of the core team members to determine how to facilitate collaboration among themAllow them to work as a virtual team using the latest collaboration technologyCorrect answerColocate the core team membersOverall explanationColocation, or bringing the core team members together in one location, will enhance their ability to perform as a team and improve communication. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 340.
Question 73:
A project manager is about to start planning a software development project. The project sponsor would like to review all the project risks that have been identified at this point. Which document should the project manager recommend the sponsor review?
Project charter
Risk report
Issue log
Risk register
Correct answerProject charterRisk reportIssue logRisk registerOverall explanationIdeally, to learn about all the identified risks on the project, the project sponsor would have to review the risk register. However, the question states that the project manager is about to start project planning, implying that the risk register, which is created during the “identify risk” process, is not yet available. At this point in the project, only the project charter can serve the needs of the project sponsor as it contains a list of high-level risks that were identified at the time the project charter was drafted and approved.
Question 74:
You have been requested to fill in for a project manager who has called in sick midway through project execution. As you get familiar with the project team, you are impressed to see how well the team members collaborate and work through issues smoothly and effectively. Based on your observations, where is the team on the Tuckman ladder?
B
C
D
A
BCCorrect answerDAOverall explanationArea D represents the performing stage of the team development model, where the team’s performance is at its highest level. Teams that reach this level of development function as well-organized units. The team members are interdependent and work through issues smoothly and effectively. The scenario closely matches this description, making performing the best answer to the question asked. The Tuckman Ladder is one of the models used to describe stages of team development. This model is typically referred to by project management practitioners as part of the Develop Team process. The model includes five stages: forming, storming, norming, performing, and adjourning. While it is safe to say that most teams go through all five stages, some may get stuck on a particular stage or even regress (go back) to an earlier stage. On the other hand, projects with team members who have worked together in the past might skip a stage. Each stage is distinguished by different dynamics among the team members, resulting in various levels of team effectiveness. Team effectiveness is at its lowest level during the storming stage, as the environment is characterized by a high degree of conflict and a lack of collaboration among the team members. As the team members begin to work together and trust each other, in other words, the relationships between the team members normalize (thus the name of the next stage, norming), and the degree of team effectiveness increases. Teams that successfully go through the norming stage will eventually reach the performing stage, which is the highest level of team development. On the performing stage, the team functions as a well-organized unit, and the team’s effectiveness is at its highest.
Question 75:
During a project’s initial phase, a new regulation is introduced. This regulation has the potential to impact the project’s schedule and budget. What should the project manager do before beginning the planning stage?
Request a change to schedule and budget.
Update the risk response plan.
Perform a qualitative risk analysis.
Include the risk in the project charter.
Request a change to schedule and budget.Update the risk response plan.Perform a qualitative risk analysis.Correct answerInclude the risk in the project charter.Overall explanationKeyword (initial phase). A new regulation that may impact the project’s schedule and budget is an example of a high-level risk that should be documented in the project charter. The option (request a change to the schedule and budget) is not correct because there is no baseline. Perform a qualitative risk analysis is not correct because this process is in the planning phase and we are now in the initial phase.
Question 76:
For personal reasons, a key stakeholder in your construction project has recently resigned from his duties. What should you do next as part of stakeholder management?
Initiate an investigation into his resignation
Remove all changes suggested by the stakeholder
Update Stakeholder Register
Contact the sponsor
Initiate an investigation into his resignationRemove all changes suggested by the stakeholderCorrect answerUpdate Stakeholder RegisterContact the sponsorOverall explanationWhen stakeholders are no longer involved in the project, you should update the stakeholder register to remove them from the project.
Question 77:
After identifying the risks, what should the project team do next?
Develop the mitigation plan.
Perform quantitative risk analysis.
Calculate the contingency reserve.
Create a probability and impact matrix.
Develop the mitigation plan.Perform quantitative risk analysis.Calculate the contingency reserve.Correct answerCreate a probability and impact matrix.Overall explanationQualitative risk analysis is the next process after identifying the risks. A probability and impact matrix is a data representation technique that can be used during the qualitative risk analysis process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 425.
Question 78:
There are a variety of stakeholders on your project, representing several different functional areas. While collecting requirements from all of them, you want to define the cross-functional requirements and reconcile stakeholder differences. Which requirement collection technique is best used to achieve this goal?
Interviews
Brainstorming
Focus Groups
Facilitation
InterviewsBrainstormingFocus GroupsCorrect answerFacilitationOverall explanationFacilitation is considered a primary technique for quickly defining cross-functional requirements and reconciling stakeholder differences. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 145.
Question 79:
Which of the following analyses integrates scope, cost, and schedule measures to assess project performance?
Variance analysis
Earned value analysis
Project presentations and review
Reserve analysis
Variance analysisCorrect answerEarned value analysisProject presentations and reviewReserve analysisOverall explanationEarned value analysis is used to integrate scope, cost, and schedule measures to assess project performance. Variance analysis may include only a comparison of actual performance with one specific baseline. Presentations may be used to deliver information obtained during earned value analysis.
Question 80:
When creating a work breakdown structure, what document will be used to describe the work that will be performed and the work that is excluded?
Enterprise environmental factors
Requirement documentation
Scope Management Plan
Project scope statement
Enterprise environmental factorsRequirement documentationScope Management PlanCorrect answerProject scope statementOverall explanationThe project scope statement is an input in creating a work breakdown structure process and describes the work that will be performed and the work that is excluded. PMBOK Guide 6, Page,157.
Question 81:
You are the Project Manager of a software telecom development project. You and your team finished the identification and analysis of risks in the project. Now, you are in the plan risk response phase, and you want to select the appropriate risk response strategy to deal with the opportunities that are outside the scope of the project and are managed at the program level and portfolio level. What is the best risk response strategy?
Escalate
Exploit
Avoid
Enhance
Correct answerEscalateExploitAvoidEnhanceOverall explanationEscalate. This risk response strategy is appropriate when the project team or the project sponsor agrees that an opportunity is outside the scope of the project or that the proposed response would exceed the project manager’s authority. Escalated opportunities are managed at the program level, portfolio level, or another relevant part of the organization, not at the project level. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 444.
Question 82:
Sally is a project manager working on a new automobile prototype. Her chief parts supplier has not been supplying quality parts even after a series of rejections and warnings. She has now lost hope that the vendor will ever deliver quality deliverables. What is Sally’s best course of action in this scenario?
Sally should review the terms of the contract on contract termination and take the steps to terminate the contract
Sally should continue negotiating with her supplier until the desired results are obtained
Sally should use Alternative Dispute Resolution techniques
Sally should accept the deliverables because there is no use in negotiating further with her supplier
Correct answerSally should review the terms of the contract on contract termination and take the steps to terminate the contractSally should continue negotiating with her supplier until the desired results are obtainedSally should use Alternative Dispute Resolution techniquesSally should accept the deliverables because there is no use in negotiating further with her supplierOverall explanationSince there is nothing in the question that suggests that there is a conflict between the vendor and the buyer, Alternative Dispute Resolution would not be effective. However, Sally has lost all hope that the supplier will ever deliver quality deliverables. The series of rejections and warnings show that the vendor has not improved their performance, so there is nothing to negotiate, but neither should Sally accept any poor quality or incomplete deliverables. The contract needs to be terminated. A well-written contract would include clauses that detail what qualifies as a reason for contract termination and what actions need to take place for one of the parties to terminate the contract. Sally should closely review the contract and take action to terminate it.
Question 83:
A project manager wants to present a project performance report to the management. The report needs to capture project results over the last three years to check whether the performance is improving or deteriorating. Which of the following reports should the project manager use?
Forecasting Report
Trend Analysis Report
Status Report
Earned Value
Forecasting ReportCorrect answerTrend Analysis ReportStatus ReportEarned ValueOverall explanationTrend analysis examines project performance over time to determine whether performance is improving or deteriorating. Graphical analysis techniques are useful for comprehending past performance and comparing it to future performance goals in the form of completion dates, thereby predicting future project status and performance. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 227. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 177.
Question 84:
You need to get a public opinion as part of the requirements gathering process for your project. You selected a wide variety of people for your study and want to use a requirements gathering technique that can produce results quickly. Which technique is best suited for this scenario?
Brainstorming
Observations
Questionnaires and Surveys
Affinity Diagrams
BrainstormingObservationsCorrect answerQuestionnaires and SurveysAffinity DiagramsOverall explanationQuestionnaires and surveys are written sets of questions designed to quickly accumulate information from a wide number of respondents with a quick turnaround time. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 143.
Question 85:
Which of the following statements is true related to agile teams? (Choose three).
After the team completes work in iteration or flow, the team can replan.
Agile creates the ability to do more work.
The team limits its estimation to the next few weeks at most.
Agile is based on working products of demonstrable value to customers.
Correct selectionAfter the team completes work in iteration or flow, the team can replan.Agile creates the ability to do more work.Correct selectionThe team limits its estimation to the next few weeks at most.Correct selectionAgile is based on working products of demonstrable value to customers.Overall explanationAgile favors empirical and value-based measurements instead of predictive measurements. Agile measures what the team delivers, not what the team predicts it will deliver. Baselines are often an artifact of attempted prediction. In agile, the team limits its estimation to the next few weeks at most. In agile, if there is low variability in the team’s work and if the team members are not multitasking, the team’s capacity can become stable. This allows a better prediction for the next couple of weeks. Nevertheless, being agile does not necessarily create the ability to do more work. Agile Practice Guide, Page 61.
Question 86:
Referring to the below chart, during which period did the team complete no story points at all?
A
D
B
C
ADCorrect answerBCOverall explanationArea B represents approximately the next 2 days of the iteration. The exact number of days in this area is not important. What important is that the curve of the story points remaining to be completed is flat, meaning the team did not complete any work at all. Finding the reason for why this occurred may help the team improve the process going forward.
Question 87:
You have submitted the cost baseline to the sponsor. After the review, the sponsor told you that the amount you have estimated for a certain month is more than the funds that can be disbursed for that month. What do you think the sponsor will advise you to do?
To remove some of the work scope for that month
To motivate the project team to do the work of that month without being fully paid for it
To reduce the cost estimates of the activities for that month
To reschedule the work for that month
To remove some of the work scope for that monthTo motivate the project team to do the work of that month without being fully paid for itTo reduce the cost estimates of the activities for that monthCorrect answerTo reschedule the work for that monthOverall explanationRescheduling work for the period where funds are lower than estimated will be required in this situation. Removal of scope is not a correct option. It will be tough to motivate people to work without being paid, and this may not be legally okay either. Reducing the estimates is also not an option as this will mean that the original estimates were incorrect. The chosen option will require a change request, which will impact the cost baseline.
Question 88:
You are negotiating with a contractor for additional staff augmentation, a number of software developers, and a few testers. As a buyer, you don’t quite have the exact statement of work ready. What kind of contract is most appropriate for this kind of work?
Time and Materials
Fixed Price Incentive Fee Contracts - FPIF
Firm Fixed Price Contract - FFP
Cost plus fixed fee - CPFF
Correct answerTime and MaterialsFixed Price Incentive Fee Contracts - FPIFFirm Fixed Price Contract - FFPCost plus fixed fee - CPFFOverall explanationAs the nature of work is not quite clear and this deals with contracting additional staff, the best choice of the contract is T and M. Fixed price contracts are applicable where the scope of work is quite clear, which is not the case here. Choosing a cost-reimbursable contract makes no sense since the unit rate of staff can be determined and agreed upon between you and the seller. So, the best option is T and M.
Question 89:
The project management plan specified that a predictive development approach has been selected to produce the project deliverables. Where in the project life cycle will the overall project risk be the lowest?
B
C
A
D
BCACorrect answerDOverall explanationArea D represents project closure. At this point in the project life cycle, all deliverables are supposed to be completed and accepted, and project objectives met. By that time, the project is supposed to have little to no unknowns, and, therefore, the overall project risk should be at its lowest level. The life cycle of a typical traditionally managed project consists of initiation, planning, execution, monitoring and controlling, and closure. Overall project risk is the effect of uncertainty on the project as a whole. Many various factors contribute to the overall project risk: technical, managerial, commercial, and external, to name but a few. Deliverables are not produced until the project enters its execution. Project objectives, such as scope, schedule, cost, quality, etc. are not being measured during project initiation and planning. At that point, there are many unknowns, and it’s even unclear if the project will meet its objectives. Therefore, the overall project risk at the beginning of the project is the greatest. As the project progresses, decisions are made, and deliverables are produced and accepted, the overall project risk decreases. During project closure, there are typically not too many unknowns left (if at all). After the deliverables are accepted and the project’s objectives are met, “victory” can be declared. This is where the overall project risk is considered very low or non-existent. Therefore, of the choices provided, the risk is the lowest during project closure (area D). PMBOK Guide 6, Page(s) 549, 397.
Question 90:
A project requires five tasks to be completed. Task A begins on day 1 and will take two days to complete. Task B will take 6 days to complete and cannot be begun until Task A is finished. Task C will take 4 days to complete, and it cannot begin before task A is finished, and must be completed before task D begins. Task D will take 8 days to complete and won’t be able to begin until Task B is completed. Task E will take 1 day to complete and cannot begin until Task D is finished. What is the duration of the critical path?
21 days.
15 days.
17 days.
19 days.
21 days.15 days.Correct answer17 days.19 days.Overall explanationThe duration of the critical path is 17 days
Question 91:
As a project manager, you focused on improving the teamwork process in previous iterations. However, there is barely any improvement. How could you tackle that?
Shorten iterations and create a robust definition of done.
Capture no more than three items to improve at each retrospective.
Ask the product owner to become an integral part of the team.
Consider team spikes to learn.
Shorten iterations and create a robust definition of done.Correct answerCapture no more than three items to improve at each retrospective.Ask the product owner to become an integral part of the team.Consider team spikes to learn.Overall explanationAsking the product owner to become an integral part of the team can be helpful to avoid false starts and wasted efforts, but this is not the case. When the team has too much upfront work that is leading to rework, the best option would be to consider team spikes to learn or shorten iterations and create a robust definition of done. On the other hand, slow or no improvement in the teamwork process can be tackled by capturing no more than three items to improve at each retrospective or asking the servant leader to help the team learn how to integrate those items. Agile Practice Guide, Page 59.
Question 92:
A project is in its initial planning. Due to the nature of the project, the project manager needs to develop a highly detailed project scope statement. Which of the following elements should be included? (Choose three)
description of the deliverables that will need to be produced to complete the project
The conditions to be met in order to close or cancel the project
The conditions that are required to be met before deliverables are accepted
The identification of what will be out of the project scope
A hierarchical decomposition of the total scope of work to be carried out by the project team
The assigned project manager, responsibility, and level of authority
Correct selectiondescription of the deliverables that will need to be produced to complete the projectThe conditions to be met in order to close or cancel the projectCorrect selectionThe conditions that are required to be met before deliverables are acceptedCorrect selectionThe identification of what will be out of the project scopeA hierarchical decomposition of the total scope of work to be carried out by the project teamThe assigned project manager, responsibility, and level of authorityOverall explanationThe project scope statement provides a description of the project scope, major deliverables, and exclusions. The elements typically included in the project scope statement include the following: the project scope description, deliverables, acceptance criteria, and project exclusions. The correct answer choices describe the deliverables, acceptance criteria, and project exclusions. The incorrect answer choices represent elements that should be included in the project charter or describe the work breakdown structure (WBS). PMBOK Guide 6, Page(s) 154-155.
Question 93:
You are the project manager for a mobile application development project. An issue has appeared on the project, and one of your project team members informed you that this issue has occurred before, but he cannot remember the solution. Which of the following options should you refer to first to find the solution?
Organizational process assets
Organizational Strategy
Checklists
Issue management procedures
Correct answerOrganizational process assetsOrganizational StrategyChecklistsIssue management proceduresOverall explanationThe organizational process assets include: issue and defect management procedures defining issue and defect controls, issue and defect identification and resolution, and action item tracking. Issue and defect management database(s) containing historical issue and defect status, issue and defect resolution, and action item results. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 94.
Question 94:
In a recent meeting, the customer asked to reduce the cost of the product as much as possible while improving product performance and quality. You passed this message on to the product design team and also advised them to consider aspects of product reliability, safety, installation, usability, and service. They went back and decided to apply a certain technique. Which of the following is the technique you think they have used?
Design for X
Problem-solving
Quality improvement method of PDCA
Quality improvement method of Six Sigma
Correct answerDesign for XProblem-solvingQuality improvement method of PDCAQuality improvement method of Six SigmaOverall explanationDesign for X (DfX) is a set of technical guidelines that may be applied during the design of a product for the optimization of a specific aspect of the design. DfX can control or even improve the product’s final characteristics. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 295.
Question 95:
You have been waiting for some material resources from your supplier for your project. In order to avoid delays, you’ll want to implement a contingency plan to buy those resources and keep the project on track. Which of the following includes the criteria that trigger the use of a contingency plan?
Organizational Process Assets
Risk Audit Documents
Risk Management Plan
Risk Register
Organizational Process AssetsRisk Audit DocumentsRisk Management PlanCorrect answerRisk RegisterOverall explanationThe Risk Register documents the contingency plans and triggers that call for their execution. PMBOK 6 Guide, Page 448.
Question 96:
You have recently joined an organization as the Marketing Manager. You have been told that a new product has just been created and you will need to get it onto the market within the next month. This means press releases, TV, radio, Internet and newspaper adverts, and a big launch, with at least one local celebrity. You request a meeting with a project manager for advice on initiating the project, but you are told the organization doesn’t have a project manager, it just has a part-time project coordinator. What is the organizational structure of the organization?
Project-oriented
Strong matrix
PMO
Balanced matrix
Project-orientedStrong matrixPMOCorrect answerBalanced matrixOverall explanationSee Table 2-1. Influences of organizational structures on projects. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 47.
Question 97:
You are a project manager, and you are working on a multi-phase project as your project is planned to last three years. A best practice is to:
Rely on your PMO for guidance
Use a single prime contractor and have this contractor award any subcontracts
Set up a tight matrix
Periodically review the business case
Rely on your PMO for guidanceUse a single prime contractor and have this contractor award any subcontractsSet up a tight matrixCorrect answerPeriodically review the business caseOverall explanationThe best practice in multi-phase projects is to review the business case on a regular basis to determine whether you will continue with the project or cancel it. Although the business documents are developed prior to the project, they are reviewed periodically. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 77.
Question 98:
While reviewing the business case during the initiation phase, the project manager finds that information is incomplete. What should the project manager do?
Issue a change request
Update the risk register
Evaluate the impact on the project constraints
Review the business case with the sponsoring organization to confirm that the project aligns with business needs
Issue a change requestUpdate the risk registerEvaluate the impact on the project constraintsCorrect answerReview the business case with the sponsoring organization to confirm that the project aligns with business needsOverall explanationThe project manager does not update or modify the business documents since they are not project documents. However, the project manager may make recommendations. So the project manager should meet the project sponsor and inform him to confirm that the project aligns with business needs. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 78.
Question 99:
You are in the norming stage of the Tuckman model when a difficult choice needs to be made on the implementation of a scope change. The senior team lead is pushing for option X because he has experience in the area. However, the rest of the team wants to use option Y because it will be using some new technology that will reduce the complexity of the implementation. You decide to follow the senior member’s recommendation. This is an example of:
Forcing
Withdrawal
Win-win
Compromising
Correct answerForcingWithdrawalWin-winCompromisingOverall explanationSince you have decided in favor of one side, this is an example of forcing power. Force/direct. Pushing one’s viewpoint at the expense of others; offering only win-lose solutions, usually enforced through a power position to resolve an emergency. This approach often results in a win-lose situation. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 349.
Question 100:
In the final meeting to approve the deliverables that were completed in a project, some stakeholders stated that the product didn’t meet their needs. What should the project manager do?
Demonstrate that the objectives in the project charter have been achieved.
Validate that the deliverables are as requested and close the project
Review the list of stakeholders and determine whether the appropriate individuals attended the meeting.
Demonstrate that the deliverables have been verified and negotiate their approval.
Correct answerDemonstrate that the objectives in the project charter have been achieved.Validate that the deliverables are as requested and close the projectReview the list of stakeholders and determine whether the appropriate individuals attended the meeting.Demonstrate that the deliverables have been verified and negotiate their approval.Overall explanationKeyword (product doesn’t meet their needs). The project charter includes the project objectives, the approval requirements, high-level requirements, project exit criteria (what are the conditions to be met in order to close or to cancel the project or phase), and project purpose. So the project manager should demonstrate that the objectives in the project charter have been achieved. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 124.
Question 101:
You are working on a project to construct a four-building complex. The project management plan calls for the completion of one building per year at a cost of $100 million each. At the end of year three, the first building was completed at a cost of $100 million, the second building was completed at a cost of $120 million, and the third building was only 50% completed at a cost of $60 million. To meet the original project management plan, what monthly performance is needed until the end of year four?
115 percent
110 percent
125 percent
120 percent
115 percent110 percentCorrect answer125 percent120 percentOverall explanationHere he ask to calculate the TCPI , to meet the original project management plan you should use the equation TCPI= (BAC-EV) / (BAC-AC) ……. BAC= 4*100 M = 400 M & AC= 100 M+ 120M + 60M = 280 M & EV= 2.5/4 X 400 M =250 M So the TCPI= (BAC-EV) / (BAC-AC) = ( 400 M -250 M ) / ( 400 M - 280 M ) = 1.25 = 125 %
Question 102:
You are managing a construction project. During your weekly status meeting, you start reporting the performance of the project in terms of scope to your stakeholders. One of your stakeholders indicates that the scope reported was not as agreed upon in the last requirements meeting that he attended. He then demands that the scope be changed based on what was discussed at the previous requirements meeting. As a project manager, what should you do first?
Document the issue in the issue log
Raise a change request
Change the project scope as demanded by the stakeholder
Ignore the stakeholder’s demand since this is not a requirements meeting
Correct answerDocument the issue in the issue logRaise a change requestChange the project scope as demanded by the stakeholderIgnore the stakeholder’s demand since this is not a requirements meetingOverall explanationThe important thing to remember in your project is that any time an issue arises, you should immediately document the issue in the Issue Log and monitor the issue until it has been resolved.
Question 103:
An agile coach is holding a training session for new product owners so they can better understand the role. The coach described the four values of the Agile Manifesto and how those values can be applied to projects. At the end of the session, the product owners were asked to match the statements on the right with those on the left to compose the values. As one of the product owners attending the session, how would you match the pairs? (The question in the real PMP Exam may ask you to match the answers by dragging and dropping the items from right to left or vice versa).
Responding to change over - contract negotiation
Simplicity over - following a plan
Customer collaboration over - comprehensive documentation
Individuals and interactions over - processes and tools
Responding to change over - contract negotiationSimplicity over - following a planCustomer collaboration over - comprehensive documentationCorrect answerIndividuals and interactions over - processes and toolsOverall explanationThe Agile Manifesto is comprised of four values and twelve clarifying principles. In this scenario, the question specifically asks about the four values of the Agile Manifesto, which are as follows:Individuals and interactions over processes and tools.Working software over comprehensive documentation.Customer collaboration over contract negotiation.Responding to change over following a plan.Note that “simplicity” is related to one of the twelve clarifying principles rather than the four values of the Agile Manifesto. That principle states; “Simplicity—the art of maximizing the amount of work not done—is essential.” Agile Practice Guide, Pages 8-9.
Question 104:
You are the project manager on a software development project. The developers and the quality control team have a poor relationship, so the developers are resisting the tests. The product cannot be delivered until it has been tested and passed by quality control. As a project manager, what should you do?
Update the quality management plan
Outsourcing the quality management activities
Evaluate the impact and inform the customer
Immediately meet with the developers and quality control team to ensure that the quality standards are met.
Update the quality management planOutsourcing the quality management activitiesEvaluate the impact and inform the customerCorrect answerImmediately meet with the developers and quality control team to ensure that the quality standards are met.Overall explanationThe project manager should be proactive and manage the conflict between the quality control department and the developers. So, the project manager should meet with the developers and quality control team to ensure that the quality standards are met.
Question 105:
It is becoming common practice to check or perform needs assessment at a program/portfolio level prior to scope management in a project. Irrespective of whether this is done or not, the project manager may collaborate with another individual during the requirements work. Who is this individual?
The business analyst
The program manager
The customer
The sponsor
Correct answerThe business analystThe program managerThe customerThe sponsorOverall explanationThe business analyst (BA) is a key individual with whom the project manager should collaborate, while the latter accounts for the requirements, their timing, cost, and value. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 132.
Question 106:
During the course of a multiphase project, a project manager extensively uses EVM to determine project statistics and predict future estimates. During which of the following processes will the total project earned value be at its maximum?
When planning processes are being performed
When executing processes are being performed
When initiating processes are being performed
During the final project close out
When planning processes are being performedWhen executing processes are being performedWhen initiating processes are being performedCorrect answerDuring the final project close outOverall explanationEarned value is the work actually completed to date. It shows you the value that the project has produced if it were terminated today. The project’s total earned value will be at its maximum during the closing process.
Question 107:
A project manager is required to update the quality management plan because of new organizational quality policies. The project manager is aware that a similar project on organizational quality policies has just closed. What should the project manager do to begin this project?
Develop a new metric as an organizational process Asset .
Ask the previous project manager for expert advice.
Ask the organization’s higher management for guidance.
Refer to the previous project’s lessons learned.
Develop a new metric as an organizational process Asset .Ask the previous project manager for expert advice.Ask the organization’s higher management for guidance.Correct answerRefer to the previous project’s lessons learned.Overall explanationSince the project manager is aware that a similar project on organizational quality policies has just closed, he can refer to the previous project’s lessons learned to update the quality management plan because of the new organizational quality policies. One of the inputs of plan quality management is the organizational process assets that include the organizational quality management system, including policies, procedures, and guidelines, as well as historical databases and lessons learned repositories. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 281.
Question 108:
You are managing a project that has a BAC of $120,000 and is supposed to finish in 6 months. After four months, the project manager confirmed that 55% of the project was completed. To date, $90,000 has been spent. What are the EV, SV, and CV?
EV=US$66,000 SV= - US$14,000 CV= - US$24,000
EV= US$60,00 SV=US$24,000 CV=US$14,000
EV=US$60,000. SV=- US$14,000 CV=- US$24,000
EV=US$66,000 SV=-US$24,000 CV=-US$14,000
Correct answerEV=US$66,000 SV= - US$14,000 CV= - US$24,000EV= US$60,00 SV=US$24,000 CV=US$14,000EV=US$60,000. SV=- US$14,000 CV=- US$24,000EV=US$66,000 SV=-US$24,000 CV=-US$14,000Overall explanationBecause 55% of the project is completed, EV = 55% X 120,000 = 66,000. & PV = 4/6*120,000 = 80,000. As a result, SV = EV-PV = 66,000–80,000 = 14,000 and CV = EV-AC = 66,000–90,000 = 24,000.
Question 109:
A predetermined list of risk categories that might give rise to individual project risks, act as sources of overall project risk, and can be used as a framework to aid the project team in idea generation when using risk identification techniques is called:
Hierarchical charts
Prompt list
Risk report
Checklists
Hierarchical chartsCorrect answerPrompt listRisk reportChecklistsOverall explanationA prompt list is a predetermined list of risk categories that might give rise to individual project risks and that could also act as sources of overall project risk. The prompt list can be used as a framework to aid the project team in idea generation when using risk identification techniques. The risk categories at the lowest level of the risk breakdown structure can be used as a prompt list for individual project risks. Some common strategic frameworks are more suitable for identifying sources of overall project risk, for example, PESTLE (political, economic, social, technological, legal, and environmental), TECOP (technical, environmental, commercial, operational, and political), or VUCA (volatility, uncertainty, complexity, ambiguity). PMBOK Guide 6, Page 416.
Question 110:
Assume you are a project manager on an IT hardware manufacturing project. During the project, you discovered that certain batches of components were failing quality inspections. What should the project manager use to lower the failure rate?
Control chart.
Tornado diagram.
Cause and effect diagram
Probability and impact matrix.
Control chart.Tornado diagram.Correct answerCause and effect diagramProbability and impact matrix.Overall explanationKeyword (lower the failure rate) The project manager should use the cause and effect diagram to find the root cause of the problem to lower the failure rate.
Question 111:
Validate scope is the process of formalizing acceptance of the completed project deliverables. When should this process be done?
At the end of the project
At the end of each phase of the project
At the beginning of the project
During the Planning processes
At the end of the projectCorrect answerAt the end of each phase of the projectAt the beginning of the projectDuring the Planning processesOverall explanationValidate scope is a monitoring and controlling process that is performed at the end of each phase of the project to achieve the formal acceptance of the completed project deliverables.
Question 112:
You have organized a project meeting. Some participants acknowledged your message, but you have no idea if they really understood you. What should you do to improve this communication model?
Switch from the basic to the interactive communication model
Decode their acknowledgments properly and encode your message delivery also properly
Use a better transmission medium
Respond to their acknowledgments properly
Correct answerSwitch from the basic to the interactive communication modelDecode their acknowledgments properly and encode your message delivery also properlyUse a better transmission mediumRespond to their acknowledgments properlyOverall explanationAn interactive model of communication will allow you to check whether participants are understanding you or not, wherein feedback/response from the participants is facilitated rather than just their acknowledgments. This can be done by asking them something simple like “any questions?” or “can anyone summarize what I just said?” PMBOK Guide 6, Page 372.
Question 113:
As a project manager for a large construction project, the project is being fast-tracked because the stakeholders have committed to the schedule. Some construction activities must be initiated before all basic scope specifications are completely developed. What type of contract should the procurement manager negotiate?
Firm fixed price (FFP).
Cost plus incentive fee (CPIF).
Cost plus fixed fee (CPFF).
Fixed price incentive fee (FPIF).
Firm fixed price (FFP).Correct answerCost plus incentive fee (CPIF).Cost plus fixed fee (CPFF).Fixed price incentive fee (FPIF).Overall explanationThe project scope is not well defined, so you can easily remove the options of Fixed Price Incentive Fee Contracts (FPIF) and Firm Fixed-Price Contracts (FFP). Option Cost Plus Incentive Fee Contract (CPIF) is the best because this type provides low risk for the buyer from CPFF. The risk is also with the buyer. However, this risk is lower than the cost plus fixed fee, where the buyer has to pay a fixed fee along with the cost incurred. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 472.
Question 114:
The project manager for building a concrete waterfall at a theme park likes to plan everything upfront and follow the waterfall method. However, the customer doesn’t want everything fixed from the beginning, as she may change her mind in a number of areas once the project is underway and needs to be sure that the project manager can allow for flow-on effects. What sort of project life cycle should the project manager use?
Predictive
Tacit
Adaptive
Explicit
PredictiveTacitCorrect answerAdaptiveExplicitOverall explanationIn an adaptive or agile life cycle, the deliverables are developed over multiple iterations where a detailed scope is defined and approved for each iteration when it begins. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 131.
Question 115:
You are managing a software development project. While performing risk response planning, you learned that the development team will use a new software product that contains bugs. The probability of this negative risk is so high that your sponsor has decided to terminate the project. This management decision to terminate the project is an example of:
Mitigating a Risk
Avoiding a Risk
Exploiting a Risk
Terminating a Risk
Mitigating a RiskCorrect answerAvoiding a RiskExploiting a RiskTerminating a RiskOverall explanationRisk avoidance involves changing the Project Management Plan to entirely avoid the threat. The most extreme avoidance strategy is to terminate the project.
Question 116:
You have been appointed as a project manager for a project, but you found that there is no project charter. You found that there is no practice of creating project charters in this organization. What will you do?
Discuss the need to have a project charter with the sponsor
Call for a project kick-off meeting and politely inform everyone that the project has started and request their cooperation
Create a project charter and inform project team members about it
Create a draft project charter and submit to your supervisor
Correct answerDiscuss the need to have a project charter with the sponsorCall for a project kick-off meeting and politely inform everyone that the project has started and request their cooperationCreate a project charter and inform project team members about itCreate a draft project charter and submit to your supervisorOverall explanationThe sponsor or initiator of the project is responsible for establishing (approving and issuing) the charter and can take the help of the prospective project manager to develop it.
Question 117:
One of the functional managers sent you an email that his team shouldn’t execute a certain task. As a project manager, what document should you review to resolve this?
Resource management plan
Work breakdown structure (WBS)
RACI (responsible, accountable, consult, and inform) chart
Project schedule
Organizational chart
Resource management planWork breakdown structure (WBS)Correct selectionRACI (responsible, accountable, consult, and inform) chartProject scheduleOrganizational chartOverall explanationThe RACI chart is useful for ensuring team members’ roles and responsibilities are clear, especially when the team consists of internal and external resources. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 317.
Question 118:
A contract type where the seller is reimbursed for all allowable costs for performing the contract work and receives a predetermined incentive fee based on achieving certain performance incentives is:
Cost Plus Fixed Fee Contract
Fixed Price Incentive Fee Contract
Cost Plus Award Fee Contract
Cost Plus Incentive Fee Contract
Cost Plus Fixed Fee ContractFixed Price Incentive Fee ContractCost Plus Award Fee ContractCorrect answerCost Plus Incentive Fee ContractOverall explanationA contract type where the seller is reimbursed for all allowable costs for performing the contract work and receives a predetermined incentive fee based on achieving a certain performance incentive is a “cost-plus incentive fee” contract. It helps protect buyer interests as a seller has a good incentive to keep costs down. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 472.
Question 119:
You are managing a large, diversified project team. In the initial days of the project, the team members behaved like independent individuals and seemed reserved, learning about their roles and responsibilities. Then, as the team began to work on the project and participate in technical decisions, their trust level grew. According to this scenario, which stage of team development is the team in?
Adjourning
Norming
Forming
Performing
AdjourningCorrect answerNormingFormingPerformingOverall explanationThe Norming stage is the stage at which team members begin to work together and adjust work habits and behavior to support the team and develop trust. There are five stages of team development: forming, storming, norming, performing, and adjourning. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 338
Question 120:
Henry is a project manager on a critical project for the organization. Henry held a meeting with the team members to discuss the status of the project, and during the meeting, he observed side conversations and some of the team members were not listening well to the meeting. What could have been done differently to prevent this type of situation?
Presentation techniques
Writing style
Listening techniques
Meeting management techniques
Presentation techniquesWriting styleListening techniquesCorrect answerMeeting management techniquesOverall explanationMeeting management is taking steps to ensure meetings meet their intended objectives effectively and efficiently. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 386.
Question 121:
A project manager uses the schedule from a similar project to estimate the cost of the project activities for a new project. Which method was used to derive the estimates?
Expert judgement
Analogous estimating
Bottom-up estimating
Parametric estimating
Expert judgementCorrect answerAnalogous estimatingBottom-up estimatingParametric estimatingOverall explanationKeyword (uses the schedule from a similar project). Analogous estimates are usually made in the initial stages of the project when limited information is known. They use historical information and expert judgment. Analogous cost estimating is generally less costly and time-consuming compared to other methods, but it is also less accurate.
Question 122:
Which of the following is a shared risk-reward relationship in procurement? (Choose all applicable)
Fixed-price increments.
Multi-tiered structure.
Early cancellation option.
Time and materials.
Correct selectionFixed-price increments.Correct selectionMulti-tiered structure.Early cancellation option.Time and materials.Overall explanationMany project failures stem from breakdowns in the customer-supplier relationship. Projects incur more risk when those involved in the contract take the perspective of winners vs. losers. A collaborative approach is one that pursues a shared-risk-reward relationship where all sides win, including all of the following types: multi-tiered structure, emphasize value delivered, fixed-price increments, not-to-exceed time and materials, and graduated time and materials. dynamic scope, team augmentation, and preference for full-service suppliers. Agile Practice Guide, Page 77-79.
Question 123:
To avoid slippage of the project finish date, you want to fast track your project by running some activities in parallel if additional resources are available. How do you find out the availability of resources for those activities?
By reviewing the Work Breakdown Structure
By verifying Activity Resource Requirements
By reviewing Resource Calendars
By reviewing Activity Lists
By reviewing the Work Breakdown StructureBy verifying Activity Resource RequirementsCorrect answerBy reviewing Resource CalendarsBy reviewing Activity ListsOverall explanationInformation on which resources are potentially available during the planned project period is obtained by reviewing resource calendars. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 323.
Question 124:
As a project manager, you want to follow the best practices for your project right from the beginning. You understand the importance of having a formal kick-off meeting to launch the project with all your key stakeholders (including the customer). However, you are worried about the behavior of some of your team members. At the last internal meeting, there was utter chaos, with the speaker shouting to be heard while others kept talking amongst themselves, ignoring the speaker. What is the best strategy to use to avoid this situation in the kick-off meeting?
Communicate ground rules and ensure they are followed in all the meetings
Set objectives of the kick-off meeting clearly, so that all the attendees are aware of the meeting agenda
Ensure that only key stakeholders are invited to avoid inviting disinterested people who wouldn’t listen to the speaker
Meet the troublemakers in the team and communicate to them the importance of meetings for project success. Warn them of disciplinary action if they don’t oblige.
Correct answerCommunicate ground rules and ensure they are followed in all the meetingsSet objectives of the kick-off meeting clearly, so that all the attendees are aware of the meeting agendaEnsure that only key stakeholders are invited to avoid inviting disinterested people who wouldn’t listen to the speakerMeet the troublemakers in the team and communicate to them the importance of meetings for project success. Warn them of disciplinary action if they don’t oblige.Overall explanationGround rules are a set of rules governing how the team interacts, makes decisions, and handles issues that must be resolved. This would also help resolve conflicts inherent in any project. Ground rules should be established at the very start of the project, preferably at the kick-off meeting. So, communicating ground rules is best as it helps the project manager prevent future conflicts without any harmful emotion to the team.
Question 125:
The Executive Vice President of Finance has informed you that you will be the project manager for an energy audit the company is performing in order to save expenses. He has assigned you to identify the stakeholders and start documenting the high-level assumptions and constraints. Your project is at what stage?
Executing
Monitoring and Controlling
Planning
Initiating
ExecutingMonitoring and ControllingPlanningCorrect answerInitiatingOverall explanationIdentifying stakeholders, high-level assumptions, and constraints are part of developing the project charter, which is a part of the Initiating Process Group.
Question 126:
In a project team, there are regular issues related to the resignation of staff and delays in acquiring replacements for them. You took a serious view of this and began to clearly understand what was going on and then broke it down into smaller issues to address. Next, you proceed to gather all the information you can about what happened in the past with respect to these issues. You performed a root-cause analysis. What should you do next?
Identify various potential solutions, select the most appropriate ones, implement them and check if that solves the issue
Focus only on quick replacements and not the resignations
Meet with HR to address this issue
Create an action plan and implement it
Correct answerIdentify various potential solutions, select the most appropriate ones, implement them and check if that solves the issueFocus only on quick replacements and not the resignationsMeet with HR to address this issueCreate an action plan and implement itOverall explanationThis option reflects the steps of problem-solving. It is important to identify various options before finalizing the action plan. Although this is mentioned as a technique for controlling physical resources in the PMBOK Guide, it may be used for solving any type of problem.
Question 127:
As a project manager, Martin is worried about achieving a stable velocity after two iterations. Is Martin right?
Yes, after the second iteration, the team velocity usually is stable.
No, in agile projects teams cannot reach a stable velocity due to multitasking.
No, it usually takes four to eight iterations to achieve a stable velocity.
No, it usually takes eight to twelve iterations to achieve a stable velocity.
Yes, after the second iteration, the team velocity usually is stable.No, in agile projects teams cannot reach a stable velocity due to multitasking.Correct answerNo, it usually takes four to eight iterations to achieve a stable velocity.No, it usually takes eight to twelve iterations to achieve a stable velocity.Overall explanationThe velocity is the sum of the story point sizes for the features actually completed in this iteration. It allows the team to plan its next capacity more accurately by looking at its historical performance. Teams might discover it can take four to eight iterations to achieve a stable velocity. The teams need feedback from each iteration to learn about how they work and how to improve. Agile Practice Guide, Page 64.
Question 128:
You are managing a construction project. During the project execution, the architect-engineer resigned. You need to negotiate with the functional manager to get another one. Which of the following will help you convince him?
Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS)
Project charter
Team charter
RACI Chart
Resource Breakdown Structure (RBS)Project charterTeam charterCorrect answerRACI ChartOverall explanationA RAM or RACI chart shows the project resources assigned to each work package. It is used to illustrate the connections between work packages, activities, and project team members. A RACI chart is a useful tool to use to ensure a clear assignment of roles and responsibilities when the team consists of internal and external resources. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 317.
Question 129:
You are a project manager working on a strict deadline. You found a work package on the critical path that is highly complex and could delay the final delivery of your product. After consulting with your customer, you decided to drop this work package from the project. Which risk response strategies did you use in this case?
Retention
Reduction
Avoid
Sharing
RetentionReductionCorrect answerAvoidSharingOverall explanationAs a project manager, you use risk avoidance or elimination by not doing the activity. Other approaches are reduction by mitigating the risk, sharing by outsourcing, or insuring and retention by accepting and budgeting for project risks.
Question 130:
When are the lessons learned collected?
After finishing project executing
During project closure
Throughout the project
Before the beginning the next phase
After finishing project executingDuring project closureCorrect answerThroughout the projectBefore the beginning the next phaseOverall explanationlessons Learned Collected throughout the project.
Question 131:
A company launching a new product estimates that implementing a quality control system will cost $1 million. Expected failures and potential repair costs are estimated at $500,000. Without considering the reputation damage, what should the project manager propose?
Factoring in the loss of reputation costs before making a decision
Implementing a quality control system, as this is the cost of quality (COQ)
Not implementing a quality control system, as the cost of nonconformance is less
Implementing a quality control system, as quality control is a best practices
Factoring in the loss of reputation costs before making a decisionImplementing a quality control system, as this is the cost of quality (COQ)Correct answerNot implementing a quality control system, as the cost of nonconformance is lessImplementing a quality control system, as quality control is a best practicesOverall explanationA cost-benefit analysis is a financial analysis tool used to estimate the strengths and weaknesses of alternatives in order to determine the best alternative in terms of benefits provided. A cost-benefit analysis will help the project manager determine if the planned quality activities are cost-effective. The primary benefits of meeting quality requirements include less rework, higher productivity, lower costs, increased stakeholder satisfaction, and increased profitability. A cost-benefit analysis for each quality activity compares the cost of the quality step to the expected benefit. So the correct answer is not to implement a quality control system, as the cost of nonconformance is lower. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 282, PMBOKK Guide 7, Page 102.
Question 132:
Maria has recently been assigned as the project manager for a new school construction project. She suspects that there are materials in the building that may be a serious health hazard. What should Maria do first?
Perform integrated change control.
Assess the risk and update the risk register.
Implement the risk response plan.
Hire a hazardous materials expert to investigate.
Perform integrated change control.Assess the risk and update the risk register.Implement the risk response plan.Correct answerHire a hazardous materials expert to investigate.Overall explanationKeyword (suspect). So, the first step is to hire a hazardous expert to carry out an inspection. The project manager can stop the work immediately if the scenario mentioned (ensure) not (suspect).
Question 133:
You are the project manager of a hospital project and are working with the project stakeholders to determine the project requirements. Which tool and technique can be best used for generating and prioritizing the project requirements?
Mind mapping
Affinity diagram
Nominal group technique
Brainstorming
Mind mappingAffinity diagramCorrect answerNominal group techniqueBrainstormingOverall explanationThe nominal group technique enhances brainstorming with a voting process used to rank the most useful ideas for further brainstorming or prioritization. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 144.
Question 134:
Open Inc. was contracted to install 200,000 square feet of floor tile in three food production facilities in Oman. There were some concerns raised by the customer that the total square footage was not met, and the buyer opened up a claim. The activity of opening this claim is related to:
Control Procurements
Plan Procurement Management
Conduct Procurements
Close Project or phase
Correct answerControl ProcurementsPlan Procurement ManagementConduct ProcurementsClose Project or phaseOverall explanationThe opening of a claim is in controlling procurements or the control procurement process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 498.
Question 135:
A private engineering company has bagged a contract to design and build coaches for the railway ministry. Ten coaches have to be supplied in two months. The total budget is $200,000. Assume that the design is over and only coach building and budget allocation have to be done at the same rate over the next 2 months. At the end of one month, the actual cost was $150,000, and five coaches were built. What are the values of SPI and CPI, and what is the status of the project?
SPI=0.67, CPI=1, on schedule, over budget
SPI=1, CPI=0.67, on schedule, within budget
SPI=1, CPI=0.67, on schedule, over budget
SPI=0.67, CPI=1, on schedule, over budget
SPI=0.67, CPI=1, on schedule, over budgetSPI=1, CPI=0.67, on schedule, within budgetCorrect answerSPI=1, CPI=0.67, on schedule, over budgetSPI=0.67, CPI=1, on schedule, over budgetOverall explanationSPI=100,000/100,000 = 1, CPI=100,000/150,000 = 0.67on schedule, over budget
Question 136:
You are managing a project to build a multi-building complex in your city. You are waiting for the clearance to start construction on the building. Which kind of dependency is this an example of?
External Dependency
Mandatory Dependency
Internal Dependency
Discretionary Dependency
Correct answerExternal DependencyMandatory DependencyInternal DependencyDiscretionary DependencyOverall explanationThis is an example of external dependency that involves the relationship between the project and non-project activities that are outside the control of the project manager. For example, government clearance is required before construction activity can start at a site. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 192
Question 137:
You received responses from various sellers regarding the product needs of your project. Your project has an evaluation team that will choose one or more bidders based on the information provided by the sellers. What documentation from the bidders should your evaluation team review to select a seller?
Procurement Agreement
Project Management Plan
Seller Performance Evaluation Documentation
Seller proposals
Procurement AgreementProject Management PlanSeller Performance Evaluation DocumentationCorrect answerSeller proposalsOverall explanationA seller evaluation is performed in the “Conduct Procurement” process.
Question 138:
In your construction project, you distributed some procedures about how each of your team members should communicate with various stakeholders. However, one of your key stakeholders has complained about his changes not getting implemented, although you have change control procedures in place. Which of the following should you use immediately to document this stakeholder’s concerns?
Change Log
Stakeholder Register
Risk Register
Issue Log
Change LogStakeholder RegisterRisk RegisterCorrect answerIssue LogOverall explanationDon’t get confused by the question. The key stakeholder raised an important issue in this scenario. Therefore, you must document this in the issue log first.
Question 139:
A project team is using the Stacey Complexity Model to map the degree of uncertainty in the project and select the appropriate project life cycle. As the meeting progresses, it becomes evident that while the requirements are well-known, the team is unfamiliar with the technology required to implement them. As a result, the team selects an adaptive project life cycle. Where on the Stacey Complexity Model did the team most likely map the project?
D
C
B
A
DCorrect answerCBAOverall explanationArea C represents projects with one uncertainty aspect being high and the other uncertainty aspect being low to medium. Projects that are mapped within this area are referred to as complex projects and would benefit from an adaptive life cycle. In the scenario, the requirements are well-known (a low degree of uncertainty). However, the team is unfamiliar with the technology required to implement them, implying the technical degree of uncertainty is high. Also, the team selected an adaptive life cycle, making this choice the best answer to the question asked. A project life cycle is the series of phases that a project passes through from its start to its completion. (Note, the word “phase” in this context is used differently from how it’s used in multi-phase projects). The project life cycle provides the basic framework for managing the project. Predictive, iterative, incremental, adaptive, and and hybrid are examples of a project life cycle. The selection of the life cycle depends on project characteristics. There are various models that can be used to describe project characteristics. One of them is the Stacey Complexity Model. The model addresses the degree of uncertainty as it relates to the project requirements on the one hand and how to fulfill those requirements using current knowledge and technology on the other hand. The technical degree of uncertainty is mapped on the horizontal axis, and the uncertainty of requirements is on the vertical axis. According to the model, as project uncertainty increases along any of those dimensions, so too does the risk of rework and the need to use a different project management approach. When project requirements, as well as the technology to implement these requirements, are clear, the predictive project life cycle is typically the way to go. As the degree of uncertainty increases, the likelihood of changes, risk, and rework increases as well. Such projects would benefit from either iterative, incremental, adaptive, or hybrid life cycles. When both the technical degree of uncertainty and the degree of uncertainty in project requirements is very high, a project is considered chaos (or anarchy). Managing such a project is very hard to impossible.In the scenario, the project requirements are well-known, meaning the degree of uncertainty in requirements is low. However, the team is unfamiliar with the technology required to implement them, implying the technical degree of uncertainty is high. Based on these findings, the team selects an adaptive project life cycle, implying the project has been mapped within area C. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 19, Agile Practice Guide, Pages 13-16.
Question 140:
You are a project manager building a prototype board for an embedded project. Since your organization lacks the required level of fabrication expertise, you outsource the fabrication process for board development to an external vendor. During the course of the project, the vendor informed you of a probable delay of 3 days in the final delivery of the fabricated board. This is an example of:
Secondary Risk
Risk Trigger
Risk Workaround
Residual risk
Correct answerSecondary RiskRisk TriggerRisk WorkaroundResidual riskOverall explanationA secondary risk can be defined as a risk created by a response to another risk. In other words, the secondary risk is a consequence of dealing with the original risk. In the current scenario, the delay of the final deliverable by an external vendor is a response to the existing risk of inadequate in-house expertise for board fabrication. It is important to understand the difference between secondary risk and residual risk. Secondary risks are those which are caused by the treatment or response to the risk, whereas residual risk is the risk that remains even after you have treated or responded to the risk.
Question 141:
A project manager has a good understanding of the expectations of the project stakeholders. What action should the project manager take next to effectively plan the project?
Assess required competencies against resource availability.
Conduct a kick-off meeting with the team.
Discover needs and decomposes them into requirements.
Determine the project budget and funding sources.
Assess required competencies against resource availability.Conduct a kick-off meeting with the team.Correct answerDiscover needs and decomposes them into requirements.Determine the project budget and funding sources.Overall explanationWe can ask the question another way to make it easy. What is the next process after developing the project charter and identifying stakeholders? The answer is to collect the requirements. The project’s success is directly influenced by active stakeholder involvement in the discovery and decomposition of needs into the project and product requirements and by the care taken in determining, documenting, and managing the requirements of the product, service, or result of the project. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 140.
Question 142:
A project consists of 5 activities: A, B, C, D, and E. Task A begins on day 1 and will take two days to complete. Task B will take 6 days to be completed and can not begin until task A is finished. Task C will take 4 days to be completed and can not begin before task A is finished, and must be completed before task D begins. Task D will take 8 days to be completed and can not begin until task B is finished. Task E will take 1 day to be completed and can not begin until task D is finished. What is the duration of the critical path?
19
22
13
17
192213Correct answer17Overall explanationThe critical path is A-B-D-E with a total of 17.
Question 143:
A project manager is leading a project to design and develop a new cutting-edge computer system, which is in the second of five phases. The project is running behind schedule and significantly over budget due to force majeure. The project is being conducted internally to maintain control over the proprietary technology that will provide a competitive advantage. The project has reached a phase gate. What is the purpose of performing the phase gate?
The project’s performance is compared to the business documents to determine if the project should continue to the next phase, end the project, or repeat the phase
Determine how many resources are required to complete the project according to the project baseline
Obtain customer acceptance of project deliverables
Adjust the schedule and cost baselines based on past performance
Correct answerThe project’s performance is compared to the business documents to determine if the project should continue to the next phase, end the project, or repeat the phaseDetermine how many resources are required to complete the project according to the project baselineObtain customer acceptance of project deliverablesAdjust the schedule and cost baselines based on past performanceOverall explanationA phase gate is a review point at the end of a phase to determine if the project will continue to the succeeding phase, end the project, repeat the phase, or continue with some modifications. The business documents and project charter are needed to determine whether or not the project should progress to the next phase. PMBOK Guide 6, page 21.
Question 144:
Stakeholders are in a meeting to decide on the project and development life cycle to be used on their project. The project manager and the scrum master collaborate on the meeting room whiteboard to list the various life cycles and their characteristics. What was the most likely match between the life cycles and the characteristics that the project manager and scrum master listed? (The question in the real PMP Exam may ask you to match the answers by dragging and dropping the items from right to left or vice versa).
Iterative life cycle - Employs both iterative and incremental characteristics
Incremental life cycle - Combines aspects of both predictive and agile methods
Predictive life cycle - Takes advantage of things that are known and proven
Agile life cycle - Provides deliverables that can be used immediately
Iterative life cycle - Employs both iterative and incremental characteristicsIncremental life cycle - Combines aspects of both predictive and agile methodsCorrect answerPredictive life cycle - Takes advantage of things that are known and provenAgile life cycle - Provides deliverables that can be used immediatelyOverall explanationThere are many factors that must be considered when selecting the optimal life cycle for a particular project. A project manager that is well-versed in various methodologies will be better positioned to make the appropriate recommendations. In this scenario, all that is required to answer the question correctly is to match a project life cycle with its basic characteristic.A predictive life cycle (sometimes referred to as waterfall) is a traditional approach where most or all of the project planning is done before project execution begins and then executed in a sequential fashion.When incorporating an iterative life cycle, the project team uses successive prototypes or proofs of concept and gains feedback after each one, which further refines the project deliverable(s). The iterative approach incorporates a feedback loop to ensure alignment with stakeholder needs and expectations. The fundamental difference between iterative and incremental life cycles is that an iterative life cycle delivers the project’s results (product, service) at the end of the project, whereas an incremental life cycle will frequently deliver smaller product increments that can provide immediate benefits.When the project team combines the iterative and incremental life cycles, the approach is referred to as an agile life cycle. An agile life cycle uses short iterations and frequent feedback to produce a product increment that can be used immediately. In this manner, the customer can gain the benefit of early and frequent delivery of business value.Lastly, a hybrid life cycle combines elements from two or more different life cycles to achieve the project’s objectives. A combination of predictive, iterative, incremental, and/or agile approaches is a hybrid project. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 19, Agile Practice Guide, Page(s) 17, 26.
Question 145:
While gathering requirements for your project, you decided which requirements to accept from stakeholders based on the agreement from the largest block, even if a majority is not achieved. What group decision-making technique have you used in this scenario?
Plurality
Majority
Dictatorship
Unanimity
Correct answerPluralityMajorityDictatorshipUnanimityOverall explanationIn the plurality decision-making technique, the largest block in the group decides even if a majority is not achieved. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 144.
Question 146:
A check sheet has been created for your project. Some team members had already created a checklist. This has caused some confusion about check sheets and checklists. You called for a meeting to clarify, and you told them that the following are the correct meanings of both the terms:
The confusion has been created unnecessarily, both checklist and check sheet mean the same
Check sheets are created in quality planning, whereas checklists in quality control
Check sheets are quality test scenarios, whereas a checklist may be used when taking those measurements
A checklist may be used to check compliance to steps of a procedure, whereas a check sheet may be used to tabulate test results
The confusion has been created unnecessarily, both checklist and check sheet mean the sameCheck sheets are created in quality planning, whereas checklists in quality controlCheck sheets are quality test scenarios, whereas a checklist may be used when taking those measurementsCorrect answerA checklist may be used to check compliance to steps of a procedure, whereas a check sheet may be used to tabulate test resultsOverall explanationCheck sheets are tabulated results of quality tests; they are not quality test scenarios. A checklist is used to check compliance with steps in a procedure, for example, whether all steps are being followed while measuring something. Checklists are created in the Manage Quality process, whereas check sheets are in quality control.
Question 146:
A check sheet has been created for your project. Some team members had already created a checklist. This has caused some confusion about check sheets and checklists. You called for a meeting to clarify, and you told them that the following are the correct meanings of both the terms:
The confusion has been created unnecessarily, both checklist and check sheet mean the same
Check sheets are created in quality planning, whereas checklists in quality control
Check sheets are quality test scenarios, whereas a checklist may be used when taking those measurements
A checklist may be used to check compliance to steps of a procedure, whereas a check sheet may be used to tabulate test results
The procurement SOWCorrect answerThe contractThe project closure planThe requirements documentationOverall explanationThe contract must be referred to for the closure requirements and responsibilities apart from what is documented in the project management plan. The procurement SOW does not describe this procedure, and there is no document called the project closure plan. The requirements documentation is about the project requirements which will be scoped.
Question 147:
You are currently checking whether contract closure procedures were done or not and whether they were performed correctly. In addition to the project closure procedure in the project management plan, which document will you refer to?
The procurement SOW
The contract
The project closure plan
The requirements documentation
It will increase.Correct answerIt will decrease.It will return to 1.0It will remain the same.Overall explanation(SPI) is 0.8 and ( CPI ) is 0.7. It means that the project is behind schedule and over budget. So the added overtime will increase the actual cost (AC) so the CPI will decrease.
Question 148:
During the team review, the project manager learned that the schedule performance index (SPI) is 0.8 and the cost performance index (CPI) is 0.7. At the end of the meeting, the project manager asked the team members to work overtime. How will this affect the CPI?
It will increase.
It will decrease.
It will return to 1.0
It will remain the same.
Ask the team to correct the problemAdjust the project baselineCorrect answerDocument the reasons for non-acceptanceAssess the impact on cost, quality, and scheduleOverall explanationThe completed deliverables that have not been formally accepted must be documented along with the reasons for non-acceptance. After documenting the reasons, a change request must be initiated to correct the problem. During the change request process, the impact on project cost, quality, schedule, and other project parameters must be determined. After the change request is approved, the baselines must be adjusted and work assigned to the team to correct the problem.
Question 149:
During the scope validation inspection, Gloria finds out that the deliverables being presented for inspection do not meet the acceptance criteria. What should Gloria immediately do as a project manager?
Ask the team to correct the problem
Adjust the project baseline
Document the reasons for non-acceptance
Assess the impact on cost, quality, and schedule
To first move the required funds from the contingency reserve to the management reserveCorrect answerTo follow the change approval process to move the required management reserve funds to the cost baselineThere is no need for a management reserve as the risk was not factored in, and therefore it may be funded from the contingency reserveTo put in a request to the sponsor for the management reserveOverall explanationA standard procedure in such a situation is to obtain change approval to move the required funds from the management reserve to the cost baseline and then use that amount from the cost baseline. All other options are incorrect. Putting in a request to the sponsor has already been done. Management reserves are intended to address the unknown unknowns that can affect a project. The management reserve is not included in the cost baseline but is part of the overall project budget and funding requirements. When an amount of management reserves is used to fund unforeseen work, the amount of management reserve used is added to the cost baseline, thus requiring an approved change to the cost baseline. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 252.
Question 150:
Your project has been progressing well so far. Due to an expected increase in the cost of raw materials, which was not factored in as project risk, you are in need of some management reserve. The management reserve is available, but the sponsor asked you to do something to obtain it. What did the sponsor ask you to do?
To first move the required funds from the contingency reserve to the management reserve
To follow the change approval process to move the required management reserve funds to the cost baseline
There is no need for a management reserve as the risk was not factored in, and therefore it may be funded from the contingency reserve
To put in a request to the sponsor for the management reserve
Project team leadersProject team membersCorrect answerProject managerProject management teamOverall explanationThe project manager is responsible for managing task execution based on the project management plan in order to achieve project deliverables.
Question 151:
In order to achieve project deliverables, who is responsible for managing task execution based on the project management plan?
Project team leaders
Project team members
Project manager
Project management team
2 DAYS0 DAYCorrect answer1 DAY3 DAYSOverall explanationThe total float ( 5-4=1 )
Question 152:
An activity not on the critical path will be delayed by 4 days, assuming it has a float of 5 days. How many days is the total float?
2 DAYS
0 DAY
1 DAY
3 DAYS
Project management, people management, Business and strategyCorrect answerTechnical project management, leadership, strategic and business managementKnowledge, performance, personalityManagement experience, process expertise, domain experienceOverall explanationThis is the correct answer as per the PMI Talent Triangle. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 56.
Question 153:
Some of your project management peers are of the opinion that leadership and project management software usage skills are some of the most important skills a project manager should have. As per the PMI Talent Triangle, which of the following reflects all the competencies of a project manager?
Project management, people management, Business and strategy
Technical project management, leadership, strategic and business management
Knowledge, performance, personality
Management experience, process expertise, domain experience
Implement the changeTeam members who will implement the change should be asked to perform the impact analysis once again to be sureCorrect answerThe concerned stakeholders should be first informed that the change request is approvedThe project manager should check the status of the implementationOverall explanationAs the change is already approved, and it is clear that the relevant baseline has been updated, it can be implemented now, but after informing the concerned stakeholders about it first.
Question 154:
The change control board has approved the change. What should be done to implement it, assuming the relevant baseline has been updated?
Implement the change
Team members who will implement the change should be asked to perform the impact analysis once again to be sure
The concerned stakeholders should be first informed that the change request is approved
The project manager should check the status of the implementation
AuditRoot cause analysisAlternatives analysisCorrect answerProcess analysisOverall explanationThis is typical of process analysis performed as part of managing project quality. Process analysis identifies opportunities for process improvements. This analysis also examines problems, constraints, and non-value-added activities that occur during a process. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 292.
Question 155:
Some of your team members have examined the problems and constraints experienced in a certain design process. They have also identified a few non-value-added activities. Which of the following tools must they have applied to analyze the processes?
Audit
Root cause analysis
Alternatives analysis
Process analysis
Conduct procurementCorrect answerDevelop project charterDevelop project teamPlan procurement managementOverall explanation(Agreement) is input in Develop project charter Process. Agreements are used to define the initial intentions of a project. Agreements may take the form of contracts, memorandums of understanding (MOUs), service level agreements (SLA), letters of agreement, letters of intent, verbal agreements, emails, or other written agreements. Typically, a contract is used when a project is being performed for an external customer. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 78.
Question 156:
An agreement is typically used when a project is being performed for an external customer. An agreement is used as an input to:
Conduct procurement
Develop project charter
Develop project team
Plan procurement management
Correct answerWithdrawalCollaboratingCompromisingSmoothingOverall explanationThis is an example of withdrawal since the project manager was documenting the delays without trying to solve the problem.
Question 157:
A customer has been consistently late with approvals on design documentation. The project manager has raised the subject in the past, but the practice of delaying approvals has not changed. The project manager has been documenting the delays. Which conflict resolution technique has the project manager been following?
Withdrawal
Collaborating
Compromising
Smoothing
Recognition PlansTraining StrategiesProject objectivesCorrect selectionWorking daysCorrect selectionAvailability of physical resourceOverall explanationA resource calendar identifies the working days, shifts, start and end of normal business hours, weekends, and public holidays when each specific resource is available. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 323.
Question 158:
Which of the following is a component of a Resource Calendar? (Choose two.)
Recognition Plans
Training Strategies
Project objectives
Working days
Availability of physical resource
By reviewing the issue logReach out to your team lead to understand why it was missCorrect answerBy reviewing the communications management planBy reviewing the stakeholder registerOverall explanationThe communications management plan is a component of the project management plan that describes how the project communications will be planned, structured, implemented, and monitored for effectiveness. The plan contains: -Stakeholder communication requirements - Timeframe and frequency for the distribution of required information - The person responsible for communicating the information - Person or groups who will receive the information. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 377.
Question 159:
One of the shareholders sent a change request from the previous month, and till now he has not received any response. How can this situation be resolved?
By reviewing the issue log
Reach out to your team lead to understand why it was miss
By reviewing the communications management plan
By reviewing the stakeholder register
Create the stakeholder engagement strategy based on the existing stakeholder engagement assessment matrixSchedule a joint meeting with all stakeholders to conclude changes to stakeholder engagements, then adjust project communications based on itAs this is about stakeholders and communications both of which are very important for any project, you must first discuss this with the project sponsorCorrect answerReview and update the stakeholder engagement assessment matrix and make changes to communications as appropriateOverall explanationThe existing stakeholder engagement assessment matrix should be reviewed to understand the current engagement levels and modify desired levels as appropriate, after which communications may be adjusted. Just creating a stakeholder engagement strategy will not help in improving communications; it should already exist. Discussion with a sponsor will be required if any major matters require guidance that you are unable to handle or be informed about. Holding a joint meeting with stakeholders will not help understand everyone’s engagement levels.
Question 160:
You are trying to find out the effectiveness of communications activities. For this purpose, you would like to adjust communications based on any changes to stakeholder engagements. How will you do this?
Create the stakeholder engagement strategy based on the existing stakeholder engagement assessment matrix
Schedule a joint meeting with all stakeholders to conclude changes to stakeholder engagements, then adjust project communications based on it
As this is about stakeholders and communications both of which are very important for any project, you must first discuss this with the project sponsor
Review and update the stakeholder engagement assessment matrix and make changes to communications as appropriate
To determine how long the product will take to createTo determine the total cost of the productTo obtain approval from a higher authorityCorrect answerTo determine whether the product conforms to a documented standardOverall explanationAn inspection is the examination of a work product to determine whether it conforms to documented standards. The result of an inspection is generally a measurement. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 303.
Question 161:
On a project, the quality of a work product can be examined through inspection. What is the purpose of the inspection?
To determine how long the product will take to create
To determine the total cost of the product
To obtain approval from a higher authority
To determine whether the product conforms to a documented standard
2Correct answer013Overall explanationNote: As the exam time is limited and the exam is not specialized in studying the matter of scheduling and floats (Like the other PMI certificate of SP), so most probably the asked float will be Zero unless the network contains 2 or 3 activities (on which the full network drawing shall not take more than a minute). Now for this question, after drawing the network, you will notice that Activity D is on the Critical Path. So the float = zero
Question 162:
You are creating a network diagram for your project. Activity A (5 days) can start immediately. Activity B (3 days) can start after Activity A is completed. Activity C (2 days) can start after Activity B is completed. Activity D (4 days) can start after Activities A and B are completed. Activity E (3 days) can start after Activities C and D are completed. While having all activities as FS relations, what is the float of Activity D?
2
0
1
3
Cost plus incentive feeCost plus fixed feeCorrect answerFirm Fixed priceCost plus percentage of costsOverall explanationA firm fixed price is the type of contract that presents the least risk to the buyer.
Question 163:
Mark is the project manager of the Primary Disposals Project and will be contracting to buy a lock-up shed to hold plant and machinery for the duration of the project. Which type of contract represents the least risk for Mark’s project?
Cost plus incentive fee
Cost plus fixed fee
Firm Fixed price
Cost plus percentage of costs
Business caseCorrect answerBenefits management planScope baselineProject charterOverall explanationThe benefits management plan includes all that has been mentioned in the question plus strategic alignment, benefit owners, when benefits are planned, risks, and assumptions. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 29.
Question 164:
A project manager has been asked by the sponsor to assist in creating a document that will detail project benefits, when they will be delivered, and how they will be measured. Which document has been asked for?
Business case
Benefits management plan
Scope baseline
Project charter
Remove the team member from the project.Correct answerArrange for coaching from a senior project team member.Instruct the team member to work overtime to meet deadlines.Send the team member to additional training.Overall explanationIf a junior team member requires some additional guidance, the project manager should first arrange for coaching from a senior project team member before the training.
Question 165:
During the execution phase, the project manager discovered that a junior team member was struggling to complete the assigned work and required some additional guidance to get back on track. As a project manager, what should you do first?
Remove the team member from the project.
Arrange for coaching from a senior project team member.
Instruct the team member to work overtime to meet deadlines.
Send the team member to additional training.
Correct answerControllingPlanningExecutingClosingOverall explanationThe decision to close a project (normal or abnormal termination) is taken during the controlling processes.
Question 166:
The decision to close a project is taken during which process group?
Controlling
Planning
Executing
Closing
Correct answerIncremental life cycle.Iterative life cycle.Predictive life cycle.Agile life cycle.Overall explanationA predictive life cycle would fix requirements. On the other hand, an iterative approach would have a single delivery, whilst, in contrast, an agile approach will repeat activities until they are correct. If the project aims for dynamic requirements and activities to be performed once for a given increment with frequent smaller deliveries, the right approach is the incremental life cycle. Agile Practice Guide, Page 18.
Question 167:
Sam has just been hired as project manager of an IT development project. The project will have dynamic requirements, and the activities will be performed once for a given increment, with frequent smaller deliveries. He is discussing with the project sponsor the most suitable type of life cycle in this case. What should Sam recommend?
Incremental life cycle.
Iterative life cycle.
Predictive life cycle.
Agile life cycle.
Cost of testingCorrect answerWarranty costCost of documentationCost of trainingOverall explanationThe warranty cost is the only cost that belongs to the category of external failure cost. Training and documentation are prevention costs. Testing is an appraisal cost. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 282.
Question 168:
Which of the following is an example of external failure cost?
Cost of testing
Warranty cost
Cost of documentation
Cost of training
Arrange for a meeting to identify risks in the project. So far no risks have been identified.Influence risk owners to take necessary actions for the planned risks, particularly when they are busy with other workCorrect answerReview any secondary risks which arise due to agreed risk responsesIntegrate risk response activities with other project execution workOverall explanationIdentifying any secondary risks that occur due to agreed risk responses is part of risk monitoring. Influencing risk owners to take action and integrating risk response activities with other project execution work are part of risk implementation. Identifying risks for the first time is risk planning.
Question 169:
You come with a lot of project risk management experience. You are insisting that risks should be continuously monitored properly. Which of the following will you perform as part of such monitoring?
Arrange for a meeting to identify risks in the project. So far no risks have been identified.
Influence risk owners to take necessary actions for the planned risks, particularly when they are busy with other work
Review any secondary risks which arise due to agreed risk responses
Integrate risk response activities with other project execution work
Risk AvoidanceCorrect answerPassive Risk AcceptanceActive Risk AcceptanceRisk TransferOverall explanationPassive risk acceptance requires no action except to document the strategy, leaving the project team to deal with the risks as they occur and to periodically review them to ensure that they do not change significantly over time. Active risk acceptance establishes a contingency reserve, including amounts of time, money, or resources to handle the risk. Risk avoidance involves updating the Project Management Plan in order to eliminate the threat. Risk transfer actually transfers risks to other people or organizations. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 443.
Question 170:
Your project team identified a risk in your IT project and decided to handle the risk when it occurs, but also to periodically review the risk to ensure that it does not change significantly over time. What type of risk response strategy was implemented in this scenario?
Risk Avoidance
Passive Risk Acceptance
Active Risk Acceptance
Risk Transfer
Negotiate revised project end date with the customerAdd floats to few of the critical path tasksCorrect answerFast-tracking the projectCrash the critical pathOverall explanationDue to a team shortage, fast-tracking (if possible) seems to be the best option as crashing is not possible. The float cannot be added to critical path tasks, otherwise, it is no longer a critical path.
Question 171:
While adjusting the critical path, you found that extending the project end date was inevitable due to the short supply of a few people. What else can you do to prevent or reduce this project delay?
Negotiate revised project end date with the customer
Add floats to few of the critical path tasks
Fast-tracking the project
Crash the critical path
Project costCorrect answerProject scheduleCommunication managementResource managementOverall explanationThe cost performance index (CPI) is 1.05 (the project is under budget). The schedule performance index (SPI) is 0.93 (the project is behind schedule), so the project manager should focus on the project schedule and implement corrective actions to bring it back on schedule.
Question 172:
A project status report shows that the earned value (EV) is 30, the schedule performance index (SPI) is 0.93, and the cost performance index (CPI) is 1.05. In what areas should the project manager implement corrective actions?
Project cost
Project schedule
Communication management
Resource management
Escalate the problem to the HR department.Ask the team members to solve the conflict by themselvesDo nothingCorrect answerInterfering for solving the problem immediatelyOverall explanationThe project manager must interfere to solve the problem immediately because the conflict start to impact the entire project team and the moral has become low.
Question 173:
A conflict appeared between two members of your team, and the conflict began to affect the entire project team. The team’s morale has become low. As a project manager, what should you do?
Escalate the problem to the HR department.
Ask the team members to solve the conflict by themselves
Do nothing
Interfering for solving the problem immediately
Correct answerUpdate the communications management planAsk the Chief Financial Officer to talk to the Sponsor to get status updatesContinue providing the Sponsor with the status updates and ignore the Chief Financial OfficerRe-examine the stakeholder registryOverall explanationUpdate the communications management plan as part of the ongoing monitoring and controlling of communications in the project.
Question 174:
In accordance with the communications management plan, you have been providing the sponsor with status updates on a daily basis, but now the Chief Financial Officer has been coming to your desk every week to request a status update on the project. What should the project manager do?
Update the communications management plan
Ask the Chief Financial Officer to talk to the Sponsor to get status updates
Continue providing the Sponsor with the status updates and ignore the Chief Financial Officer
Re-examine the stakeholder registry
The customer only can take decisions in this processCorrect answerThe process is out of control and needs a solutionCannot be determinedThe process is in controlOverall explanationSince three data points fall outside of the control limits, the process is said to be out of control.
Question 175:
A project manager used a control chart to determine whether a process was stable or not and if its performance was predictable. If three points are showing up above the mean and four points fall outside of the control limits, what can you say about such a process?
The customer only can take decisions in this process
The process is out of control and needs a solution
Cannot be determined
The process is in control
Trend AnalysisStatistical SamplingCorrect answerScatter DiagramControl ChartOverall explanationScatter diagrams are sometimes called correlation charts because they are used to discover a change in a dependent variable in relation to a change in an independent variable.
Question 176:
Joe is working for a company that manufactures bearings for the automobile industry. He has historical information on the identified errors and defects, and he would like to use this information to plot a graph and find the change in the dependent variable with a change in the independent variable. In this context, which of the following is the best tool he can use?
Trend Analysis
Statistical Sampling
Scatter Diagram
Control Chart
Within budget and ahead of scheduleAbove budget and on scheduleWithin budget and on scheduleCorrect answerWithin budget and behind scheduleOverall explanationA CPI greater than 1 indicates being within budget, and a negative SV indicates being behind schedule.
Question 177:
A project records its CPI as 1.2 and SV as -1500. What is the status of this project?
Within budget and ahead of schedule
Above budget and on schedule
Within budget and on schedule
Within budget and behind schedule
Recognition and rewardsInterpersonal skillsCorrect answerTeam-building activitiesGround rulesOverall explanationKeyword (ineffectively - good working relationships among team members) The objective of team-building activities is to help individual team members work together effectively. Team-building strategies are particularly valuable when team members operate from remote locations without the benefit of face-to-face contact. Informal communication and activities can help in building trust and establishing good working relationships. Note: team-building activities are part of Interpersonal skills. But here you should use the son not the father. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 341.
Question 178:
During the execution of a project, the project manager discovered that one branch team’s tasks were being ineffectively influenced by one team member. What should a project manager use to ensure good working relationships among team members?
Recognition and rewards
Interpersonal skills
Team-building activities
Ground rules
Used decomposition techniques.Correct answerUsed the rolling wave planning technique for activity planning.Created a high level Gantt chart to represent the milestone only.Used subject matter expert to develop the detailed schedule.Overall explanationKeyword (The project manager struggles to provide details for the project management plan). The project manager should have used the rolling wave planning technique for activity planning to avoid this situation. Rolling wave planning is an iterative planning technique in which the work to be accomplished in the near term is planned in detail, while work further in the future is planned at a higher level. During early strategic planning, when information is less defined, work packages may be decomposed to the known level of detail. As more is known about the upcoming events in the near term, work packages can be decomposed into activities. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 185.
Question 179:
You are managing a complex construction project, and you request a five-year schedule for this project. Despite multiple brainstorming sessions with your project team, you struggle to provide details for the project management plan. This causes a delay in obtaining the project management plan approvals. As a project manager, what should you have done to avoid this situation?
Used decomposition techniques.
Used the rolling wave planning technique for activity planning.
Created a high level Gantt chart to represent the milestone only.
Used subject matter expert to develop the detailed schedule.
Hold a team meeting to discuss the request.Accept the request and make the changes.Ask the client to refrain from directly contacting team members.Correct answerRefer to the perform integrated change control process.Overall explanationSince the new concept being developed will significantly change the design and impact the project budget and schedule, the project manager should refer to the integrated change control process to manage this change.
Question 1:
A project manager just completed a successful deployment project and is preparing to transition it to an operational state before starting closeout actions. What should the project manager do to ensure that the project is ready to move to an operational state?
Refer to the project’s work in progress (WIP) reports to ensure that there is no additional work in the backlog.
Review the project approval requirements in the project charter and confirm who will be approving the project
Meet with the project team to review the work breakdown structure (WBS) and confirm deliverables have been delivered
Develop a plan to repay the technical debt incurred during the project and ensure that the project sponsor agrees with the plan.
Refer to the project’s work in progress (WIP) reports to ensure that there is no additional work in the backlog.Correct answerReview the project approval requirements in the project charter and confirm who will be approving the projectMeet with the project team to review the work breakdown structure (WBS) and confirm deliverables have been deliveredDevelop a plan to repay the technical debt incurred during the project and ensure that the project sponsor agrees with the plan.Overall explanationThe project charter provides the high-level project description and product characteristics. It also contains the project approval requirements, measurable project objectives, and related success criteria that will influence the quality management of the project. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 279.
Question 2:
An organization is transitioning from predictive to agile. Based on the requirements, the project team estimates the budget and decides to use a fixed-price contract with its vendor. However, during the execution of the project, the requirements evolve and priorities start to change constantly, which puts the project and the estimate at completion (EAC) off by 50%. What should the project manager do next?
Meet with the stakeholders to recommend the use of a time and materials (T&M) contract to address the problem
Submit a change request to the financial manager to increase the funding and continue as is.
Wait until the next gate review meeting to highlight the risk of low funds to the stakeholders
Send a detailed status report highlighting the issue with funding to all of the stakeholders
Correct answerMeet with the stakeholders to recommend the use of a time and materials (T&M) contract to address the problemSubmit a change request to the financial manager to increase the funding and continue as is.
Wait until the next gate review meeting to highlight the risk of low funds to the stakeholdersSend a detailed status report highlighting the issue with funding to all of the stakeholdersOverall explanationTIME & MATERIAL contract is the best when you use agile project management. So, the correct answer is : Meet with the stakeholders to recommend the use of a time and materials (T&M) contract to address the problem. Very Important Question for real exam. It may look suitable to Send a detailed status report highlighting the issue with funding to all of the stakeholders but this wont solve the issue of using the Fixed price contract with contiuos change in requirement.
Question 3:
During the retrospective of the fourth sprint, the development team complains that many obstacles exist within the organization that are creating project delays and rework. What should the project manager do in this situation?
Create a dedicated sprint to solve the obstacles with the team.
Include impediment resolutions during daily stand-up meetings.
Promote collaboration to help remove the obstacles for the team.
Perform a root cause analysis during the stand up meetings
Create a dedicated sprint to solve the obstacles with the team.
Include impediment resolutions during daily stand-up meetings.
Correct answerPromote collaboration to help remove the obstacles for the team.Perform a root cause analysis during the stand up meetings
Overall explanationSinc the project manager in Agile is acting as a servant leader, and the team is self organizing team, the project manager should Promote collaboration to help remove the obstacles for the team.
Question 4:
A major public-transportation construction project is aimed at significantly reducing emissions. The project has been severely delayed due to non-compliance with environmental codes and bylaws. What should the project manager have done to prevent this?
Approached the regulator for a partial waiver in light of the environmental importance of the project
Appointed a senior environmental compliance officer to report directly to the project manager
Mapped environmental compliance requirements, identified risks to achieving them, and prepared mitigations
Incorporated sufficient schedule reserves based on similar delays in past projects
Approached the regulator for a partial waiver in light of the environmental importance of the projectAppointed a senior environmental compliance officer to report directly to the project managerCorrect answerMapped environmental compliance requirements, identified risks to achieving them, and prepared mitigationsIncorporated sufficient schedule reserves based on similar delays in past projectsOverall explanationTo avoid this situation, the project manager should have mapped environmental compliance requirements, identified risks to achieving them, and prepared mitigations
Question 5:
A project team member does not submit the project status report on time. The team member is frustrated about being required to complete the report. The team member believes that the report does not reflect the reality of the project, has too many pages, and will not be read by stakeholders. What should the project manager do?
Escalate to the team member’s functional manager that the report was not submitted as requested
Review the requirements of the report with the team member to redefine its purpose
Instruct the team member to provide the report and document this in the performance review
Reassign the report to another team member to prepare and submit it as requested
Escalate to the team member’s functional manager that the report was not submitted as requestedCorrect answerReview the requirements of the report with the team member to redefine its purposeInstruct the team member to provide the report and document this in the performance reviewReassign the report to another team member to prepare and submit it as requestedOverall explanationThe project manager should be proactive and flexible and listen to the team members. In this question, the team member may be correct and the project manager should review the requirements of the report with the team member to redefine its purpose.
Question 6:
You are the project manager for a complex software development project. During a project meeting, the team members are discussing a critical feature, but there is confusion regarding its definition and the intended functionality. Some team members interpret the feature differently, leading to conceptual ambiguity. What approach should you consider to reduce this type of ambiguity and ensure a common understanding of the feature’s definition?
Formally establishing common rules and definitions of terms
Developing prototypes to distinguish relationships between variables
Applying progressive elaboration to increase the level of detail in the project plan
Conducting experiments to identify cause-and-effect relationships
Correct answerFormally establishing common rules and definitions of termsDeveloping prototypes to distinguish relationships between variablesApplying progressive elaboration to increase the level of detail in the project planConducting experiments to identify cause-and-effect relationshipsOverall explanationConceptual ambiguity, which arises from a lack of effective understanding due to different interpretations of terms, can be reduced by formally establishing common rules and definitions of terms. This approach ensures that everyone on the project team shares a common understanding of key terms and concepts, reducing confusion and ambiguity. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 120.
Question 7:
An organization is transitioning to an agile environment. The project manager finds that most of the team members are not familiar with an agile environment. What should the project manager do to address this concern?
Analyze the level of the team’s agile maturity
Meet with an agile coach to handle this issue
Support the team members’ growth and development
Change the approach with the team
Correct answerAnalyze the level of the team’s agile maturityMeet with an agile coach to handle this issueSupport the team members’ growth and developmentChange the approach with the teamOverall explanationThe keyword is (most), meaning there is a part of the team that is familiar with agile methods and the other part is not. Therefore, the current situation must be evaluated through Gap Analysis to find out the existing shortcomings, who needs training and increased knowledge, and who is at a good level. In order to support the growth and development of the team and to reach a To-Be, it is necessary first to know the As-is and the degree of maturity of each individual in the team.
Question 8:
Mobbing requires that multiple team members focus simultaneously and coordinate their contributions on a particular work item. This technique is also known as:
Swarming
Technical Debt
Pair Working
Rolling Wave
Correct answerSwarmingTechnical DebtPair WorkingRolling WaveOverall explanationSwarming is a technique in which multiple team members focus collectively on resolving a specific impediment. Agile Practice Guide, Page 154
Question 9:
A project manager is using an agile approach. During the sprint planning meeting, the product owner flagged a backlog item as high business value and easy to implement. However, the other team members identified a high dependency between this item and another item that is flagged as low business value and high complexity
Prioritize the item flagged as high business value and low complexity for this sprint.
Prioritize the item flagged as a dependency with low business value and high complexity.
Facilitate the discussion until the team reaches an agreement about the two items.
Support the team to move both items to the next sprint when the team will know more.
Prioritize the item flagged as high business value and low complexity for this sprint.
Prioritize the item flagged as a dependency with low business value and high complexity.Correct answerFacilitate the discussion until the team reaches an agreement about the two items.Support the team to move both items to the next sprint when the team will know more.
Overall explanationWhen project managers act as servant leaders, the emphasis shifts from “managing coordination” to “facilitating collaboration.” Facilitators help everyone do their best thinking and work, they also encourages collaboration through interactive meetings, informal dialog, and knowledge sharing. Agile Practice Guide, Page 35
Question 10:
A team is holding the first demonstration of the software built to date on a medium-sized project The product owner has uncovered a number of issues they would like to be addressed before providing approval How should the product owner approach this problem?
Refer to the signed business requirement document and explain that the current plan cannot facilitate these changes
No action required, the issues will be addressed in the second version of the software
Refer to the change management plan, then escalate to the steering committee
Plan to address the issues through backlog grooming and incorporate them into the next sprint
Refer to the signed business requirement document and explain that the current plan cannot facilitate these changesNo action required, the issues will be addressed in the second version of the softwareRefer to the change management plan, then escalate to the steering committeeCorrect answerPlan to address the issues through backlog grooming and incorporate them into the next sprintOverall explanationBacklog grooming, also known as backlog refinement or backlog management, is a crucial process in Agile software development. It involves reviewing, prioritizing, and refining items in the product backlog to ensure that they are well-defined, properly ordered, and ready for development. Agile Practice Guide, Page 52.
Question 11:
In which Scrum ceremony does the product owner receive new requirements from the stakeholders to include them in the product backlog?
Iteration Review
Iteration planning
Daily standup
Retrospective
Correct answerIteration Review
Iteration planning
Daily standupRetrospective
Overall explanationThe product owner receives new requirements from the stakeholders and includes them in the product backlog during the iteration review meeting. Agile Practice Guide, Page 55.
Question 12:
The code being delivered to your software development project by another team is consistently five days late. When you ask the leader of that group about the delay, he states the company’s quality control testing processes take five days. What should you do?
Add resources
Advise the leader to stop any quality control processes that are not mandated by your project policies
Crash the project
Develop a communications plan to ensure the project team understands the required delivery schedule
Add resourcesAdvise the leader to stop any quality control processes that are not mandated by your project policiesCrash the projectCorrect answerDevelop a communications plan to ensure the project team understands the required delivery scheduleOverall explanationDevelop a communications plan to ensure the project team understands the delivery schedule that is required. Deliveries coming consistently 5 days late, due to a 5 day quality control process indicate that while the deliverable itself is completed on time, the team may not be aware that all processes related to finalizing the deliverable must be completed on schedule.
Question 13:
You are managing a complex construction project and you request a five-year schedule for this project. Although multiple brainstorming sessions with your project team, you struggle to provide detail for the project management plan. This causes a delay in obtaining the project management plan approvals. As a project manager, what should you have done to avoid this situation?
Created a high level Gantt chart to represent the milestone only
Used the rolling wave planning technique for activity planning
Used subject matter expert to develop the detailed schedule
Used decomposition techniques
Created a high level Gantt chart to represent the milestone onlyCorrect answerUsed the rolling wave planning technique for activity planningUsed subject matter expert to develop the detailed scheduleUsed decomposition techniquesOverall explanationKeyword ( The project manager struggles to provide detail for the project management plan ), so the project manager should have Used the rolling wave planning technique for activity planning to avoid this situation. Rolling wave planning is an iterative planning technique in which the work to be accomplished in the near term is planned in detail, while work further in the future is planned at a higher level. During early strategic planning when information is less defined, work packages may be decomposed to the known level of detail. As more is known about the upcoming events in the near term, work packages can be decomposed into activities. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 249.
Question 14:
After the merger of two large companies, a project manager is assigned to a project. The company hires a consultant to ensure best practices are being used in information security. During an iteration, the consultant requests changes to a software component, claiming that it is not meeting market requirements. What should the project manager do?
Cancel the iteration and add the requested changes
Continue the iteration and add the requested changes
Continue the iteration and review the change with the customer and product owner
Cancel the iteration and meet with the product owner
Cancel the iteration and add the requested changesContinue the iteration and add the requested changesCorrect answerContinue the iteration and review the change with the customer and product ownerCancel the iteration and meet with the product ownerOverall explanationThe product owner is the only person who has the authority to cancel the iteration. During iteration, no changes should be added.
Question 15:
A few days before the end of the last iteration, the team informs the project manager that they will be unable to finish two work packages, A and B, because the WBS is insufficiently refined. The team thinks they might be able to complete package A on time but will need an additional week to complete package B which has a higher priority. What is the best course of action for the project manager?
Extend the iteration length in order to finish both packages A and B
Consult with the product owner and make a decision accordingly
Instruct the team to complete package A since it can be done on time
Instruct the team to complete package B since it has a higher priority
Extend the iteration length in order to finish both packages A and B
Correct answerConsult with the product owner and make a decision accordinglyInstruct the team to complete package A since it can be done on time
Instruct the team to complete package B since it has a higher priority
Overall explanationOn hybrid projects, like the one described in the scenario, the project manager and product owner share responsibilities for some of the project aspects. While the project manager decides on the overall direction of the projects, the product owner decides on the scope. Therefore, consulting with the product owner and making a decision accordingly is the best course of action for the project manager. Note: An iteration is time-boxed, and the product owner is the person responsible for prioritizing user stories and making decisions about the work.
Question 16:
A project manager is leading a team that is geographically dispersed. The team needs to collaborate and finalize the monthly reports. Occasionally, meetings occur during the weekends due to the time differences. Team members have expressed that they do not want to work on the weekends. What should the project manager do?
Communicate to the project stakeholders that the reports will be delayed certain months of the year
Take over the activity and deliver the reports whenever work is required on a weekend
Avoid reporting during the months that team members would need to work on the weekend
Remind the team members of their governance responsibilities documented in the team charter
Communicate to the project stakeholders that the reports will be delayed certain months of the yearTake over the activity and deliver the reports whenever work is required on a weekendAvoid reporting during the months that team members would need to work on the weekendCorrect answerRemind the team members of their governance responsibilities documented in the team charterOverall explanationProject team charter is a document records the project team values, agreements, and operating guidelines, and establishes clear expectations regarding acceptable behavior by project team members. PMBOK Guide7, Page 192.
Question 17:
During project execution, a high-performing team member leaves. Following this loss, a planned quality audit is conducted that indicates the work product’s quality standards are unmet. What should the project manager do next?
Perform a reserve analysis of the work performance
Create a cause and effect diagram
Consult the resource management plan
Crash the schedule
Perform a reserve analysis of the work performanceCorrect answerCreate a cause and effect diagramConsult the resource management planCrash the scheduleOverall explanationKeyword (Following this loss) may be the issue not only related to the leaving of the team member. Since the work product’s quality standards are unmet , the project manager should FIRST Create a cause and effect diagram to identify the main or root cause of the problem. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 293.
Question 18:
During the retrospective ceremony, the agile team is talking about the product owner’s expectations not being met. What should the project manager have done at the beginning of the project?
Communicated project vision and sprint goals clearly to the team
Defined the team ground rules and shared project vision
Assessed the capabilities of the agile team and planned for the required training
Defined the expected agile team contribution in the creation of the backlog
Correct answerCommunicated project vision and sprint goals clearly to the teamDefined the team ground rules and shared project visionAssessed the capabilities of the agile team and planned for the required trainingDefined the expected agile team contribution in the creation of the backlogOverall explanationThe project manager should have communicated project vision and sprint goals clearly to the team.
Question 19:
Which actions should a project manager consider while launching a new virtual team? (Choose two)
Verify if team members are on more than one team and cannot devote enough time to this team
Recruit the best resources within the organization to be part of the virtual team
Evaluate the project manager’s own strengths and weaknesses as a virtual team leader to identify avoidable pitfalls
Establish in the beginning, how progress will be monitored and the best means for communicating progress
Identify the types and quantities of resources required for each work package or activity
Correct selectionVerify if team members are on more than one team and cannot devote enough time to this teamRecruit the best resources within the organization to be part of the virtual team
Evaluate the project manager’s own strengths and weaknesses as a virtual team leader to identify avoidable pitfalls
Correct selectionEstablish in the beginning, how progress will be monitored and the best means for communicating progressIdentify the types and quantities of resources required for each work package or activity
Overall explanationOut of the presented choices, the best 2 options is to: Verify if team members are on more than one team and cannot devote enough time to this tea, so he understand the workload that can be assigned for each member, and Establish in the beginning, how progress will be monitored and the best means for communicating progress because communication is a very important aspect in virtual teams.
Question 20:
People are motivated by the need for achievement, power, or affiliation according to which theory?
Achievement Theory
Theory X
Expectancy Theory
Contingency Theory
Correct answerAchievement Theory Theory X Expectancy Theory Contingency TheoryOverall explanationAchievement. People who are motivated by achievement, such as reaching a goal, are motivated by activities and work that is challenging, but reasonable. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 159.
Question 21:
A company’s PMO has been trying to implement an adaptive approach and a project manager has been asked to use adaptive tools in their next project. This is not the first time the request has been made, and the previous project failed when adaptive tools were implemented. What should the project manager do?
Bring third-party company to develop and implement a hybrid framework for this specific project
Conduct individual interviews with key stakeholders in order to understand all concerns then prepare a communication management plan
Prepare a change request and seek approval from the steering committee regarding the new project framework
Recommend to the PMO that it’s not the right time to start implementing adaptive tools in projects
Correct answerBring third-party company to develop and implement a hybrid framework for this specific projectConduct individual interviews with key stakeholders in order to understand all concerns then prepare a communication management planPrepare a change request and seek approval from the steering committee regarding the new project frameworkRecommend to the PMO that it’s not the right time to start implementing adaptive tools in projectsOverall explanationSince the previous project failed when adaptive tools were implemented, the project manager should Bring a third-party company to develop and implement a hybrid framework for this specific project.
Question 22:
A new project team has recently been formed, and the project manager noticed that some of the team members did not feel comfortable being part of the project team. As a result, members of the team were working individually and not as a team. What should the project manager do to resolve this?
Directly guide the team members on how to perform their tasks.
Facilitate a team-building meeting to help this issue.
Wait until some iterations are completed to intervene
Allow the team members to remain in their former individual roles.
Directly guide the team members on how to perform their tasks.
Correct answerFacilitate a team-building meeting to help this issue.Wait until some iterations are completed to intervene
Allow the team members to remain in their former individual roles.
Overall explanationFacilitating team building activities builds unity, but also builds trust, empathy, and focus on the team over the individual. Team building is conducting activities that enhance the team’s social relations and build a collaborative and cooperative working environment. Team building activities can vary from a 5-minute agenda item in a status review meeting to an offsite, professionally facilitated event designed to improve interpersonal relationships. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 341.
Question 23:
A project manager is leading a technically complex project. The project is part of a strategic program of work and the first to use an agile approach. One of the board members is interested in attending a meeting to see how the delivery of the project scope is progressing. What should the project lead do?
Invite the board member to the next sprint review
Invite the board member to the next sprint retrospective
Invite the board member to a separate demo
Invite the board member to the next daily standup
Correct answerInvite the board member to the next sprint reviewInvite the board member to the next sprint retrospectiveInvite the board member to a separate demoInvite the board member to the next daily standupOverall explanationIteration review (may also be referred to as a sprint review) is a meeting held at the end of an iteration to demonstrate the work that was accomplished during the iteration.
Question 24:
A project manager at a company is considering a high-performing junior member of the organization to be the new project manager for a current project. What should the project manager do to prepare for a recommendation to senior management?
Compile key highlights featuring the team member from the meeting minutes
Gather project artifacts that demonstrate the team member’s high performance
Ask the team member to write a short biography listing their qualifications
Calculate the health of the projects on which the team member has worked
Compile key highlights featuring the team member from the meeting minutesCorrect answerGather project artifacts that demonstrate the team member’s high performanceAsk the team member to write a short biography listing their qualificationsCalculate the health of the projects on which the team member has workedOverall explanationThe project manager should Gather project artifacts that demonstrate the team member’s high performance to prepare for a recommendation to senior management.
Question 25:
You are managing a project that follows Lean principles, and you want to track the productivity rate at which deliverables are produced, validated, and accepted within a predefined interval. Which visual control should you primarily use to measure this productivity rate?
Impediment list
Task boards
Kanban boards
Burn charts
Impediment listTask boardsKanban boardsCorrect answerBurn chartsOverall explanationo track the productivity rate at which deliverables are produced, validated, and accepted within a predefined interval, you should use “burn charts,” such as burnup or burndown charts. Burn charts, specifically burndown charts, are used to measure velocity and show the remaining work or risk exposure over time. They provide insights into the rate of progress and whether the team is on track to meet its goals. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 109.
Question 26:
A project manager starts to receive emails from different stakeholders requesting information about the project status. What should the project manager do to avoid this in the future?
Include the project stakeholders’ needs while planning the project communications strategy
Designate a team member to respond to the emails from these stakeholders
Include the stakeholders’ emails in all of the project status communications
Schedule weekly project status meetings with all stakeholders including the customer and internal resources
Include the project stakeholders’ needs while planning the project communications strategyDesignate a team member to respond to the emails from these stakeholdersCorrect answerInclude the stakeholders’ emails in all of the project status communicationsSchedule weekly project status meetings with all stakeholders including the customer and internal resourcesOverall explanationThe project manager should include the stakeholders’ emails in all of the project status communications and keep them informed.
Question 27:
A project team is conducting sprint planning. Based on the estimated effort, only 95% of the items included in the sprint may be delivered. The product owner asks the project manager for advice on how to prioritize the backlog items. What should be used to prioritize the backlog items?
Technical complexity
Business value
Estimation accuracy
Risk to delivery
Technical complexityCorrect answerBusiness valueEstimation accuracyRisk to deliveryOverall explanationProduct owners rank the work based on its business value. Agile Practice Guide, Page 41.
Question 28:
A few days before the end of the last iteration, the team informs the project manager that they will be unable to finish two work packages, A and B, because the WBS is insufficiently refined. The team thinks they might be able to complete package A on time but will need an additional week to complete package B which has a higher priority. What is the best course of action for the project manager?
Extend the iteration length in order to finish both packages A and B
Consult with the product owner and make a decision accordingly
Instruct the team to complete package A since it can be done on time
Instruct the team to complete package B since it has a higher priority
Extend the iteration length in order to finish both packages A and B
Correct answerConsult with the product owner and make a decision accordinglyInstruct the team to complete package A since it can be done on time
Instruct the team to complete package B since it has a higher priorityOverall explanationOn hybrid projects, like the one described in the scenario, the project manager and product owner share responsibilities for some of the project aspects. While the project manager decides on the overall direction of the projects, the product owner decides on the scope. Therefore, consulting with the product owner and making a decision accordingly is the best course of action for the project manager. Note: An iteration is time-boxed, and the product owner is the person responsible for prioritizing user stories and making decisions about the work.
Question 29:
An integrated project involves the interaction of both hardware and software, and the sponsor has approved the schedule management plan. The project team evaluated the product’s functionality and accelerated testing. What should the project manager do as a servant leader?
Amend the project budget to include MVP testing.
Submit a change request to the project sponsor for accelerated testing.
Support the team as necessary to find the minimum viable product (MVP)
Develop the product as per the schedule to perform integration and testing.
Amend the project budget to include MVP testing.
Submit a change request to the project sponsor for accelerated testing.
Correct answerSupport the team as necessary to find the minimum viable product (MVP)
Develop the product as per the schedule to perform integration and testing.
Overall explanationFor the project manager to act as a servant leader, he should support the team as necessary to find the minimum viable product (MVP)
Question 30:
During the project execution of a CRM software following an Agile appraoch, the project manager noticed that only one team member had the technical skills needed to build the product. The project manager is afraid this might have a future impact on the quality and schedule because most of the upcoming activities will require at least three people with these technical skills. What two actions should the project manager take to prevent the team from being unqualified? (Choose two)
Facilitate a training event with an external trainer.
Teach the entire team the new skill.
Encourage working in pairs and knowledge sharing.
Exclude the activities from the roadmap.
Increase the time estimates on the activities that require such abilities.
Correct selectionFacilitate a training event with an external trainer.
Teach the entire team the new skill.
Correct selectionEncourage working in pairs and knowledge sharing.
Exclude the activities from the roadmap.
Increase the time estimates on the activities that require such abilities.
Overall explanationThe project manager should act as a servant leader by supporting the project team, removing the obstacles, so out of the presented options, the best is to: 1. Encourage working in pairs and knowledge sharing. 2. Facilitate a training event with an external trainer.
Question 31:
A project manager entered into a contract with a vendor to build a new system. During the acceptance test stage, the project manager noticed that the system quality was not satisfactory. How should the project manager support their claim to the vendor?
Document in the risk log that the issues in the system were already identified
Share unsuccessful results from previous projects with a similar scope
Show that the acceptance criteria were changed by the vendor without approval
Provide the failed test results along with the agreed-upon acceptance criteria
Document in the risk log that the issues in the system were already identifiedShare unsuccessful results from previous projects with a similar scopeShow that the acceptance criteria were changed by the vendor without approvalCorrect answerProvide the failed test results along with the agreed-upon acceptance criteriaOverall explanationTest phase in the life cycle is the final quality review and inspection of deliverables carried out before transition, go-live, or acceptance by the customer. Project teams measure quality using metrics and acceptance criteria based on requirements. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 42, 48.
Question 32:
You just completed the first phase of a multi-phase project. You have calculated earned value measurements and found that the current CPI is 0.79 and the current SPI is 1.08. Your next phase plan should focus first on which element of the project:
Cost
Schedule
Quality
Scope
Correct answerCostScheduleQualityScopeOverall explanationThe Cost Performance Index (CPI) of less than one indicates a cost overrun for the work completed. Therefore, you should focus on reducing the cost of the project.
Question 33:
You are the project manager for a software development project, and your team is in the initial planning phase. You want to create a visual representation that provides a holistic view of all the features and functionality desired for the product to ensure that the team understands what they are building and why. Which artifact should you use for this purpose?
Use case
Value stream map
Throughput chart
Story map
Use caseValue stream mapThroughput chartCorrect answerStory mapOverall explanationA story map is a visual model that helps the project team gain a holistic view of all the features and functionality desired for a product. It is particularly useful for understanding the scope of the product and the rationale behind it, making it a valuable tool during the initial planning phase of a software development project. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 190.
Question 34:
According to the Agile principles, all of the following are important factors to be considered when forming an Agile team EXCEPT:
Trust level
Team RACI
Office environment
Motivation level
Trust levelCorrect answerTeam RACIOffice environmentMotivation levelOverall explanationBuild projects around motivated individuals. Give them the environment and support they need and trust them to get the job done. Agile teams are supposed to be self-organizing and to work as a unit, developing a team RACI doesn’t support this view. Agile Practice Guide, Page 9
Question 35:
Your project sponsor asked you to provide an indication of the time remaining on an agile project. What tool can be used to provide this information?
A release burndown chart
Story points for the remaining user stories
Pareto chart
Analysis of the business requirements document
Correct answerA release burndown chart
Story points for the remaining user storiesPareto chart
Analysis of the business requirements documentOverall explanationA burndown chart is a simple tool that tracks a team’s work progress against the amount of time remaining to complete the work. The chart shows the ideal rate of effort needed to reach work completion by a set date. Using a burndown chart helps you: Communicate progress, Track remaining work, Plan for future events, Reach work completion on time. PMBOK Guide 109, Page 249, Agile Practice Guide, Page 62.
Question 36:
While collecting requirements and defining the project’s products, you have hired an external consultant to advise you on how to do it better and raise the standard for their associated methods. The consultant comes with extensive knowledge of best practices in the industry in this regard. What is the consultant mainly going to do?
Administer a questionnaire with key stakeholders in your project about their best practices
Perform benchmarking by recommending best in class practices in the industry related to collecting requirements and defining products
Brainstorm among your team members to define the best practices for requirements gathering and product definition
Teach requirements analysis techniques to the project management team
Administer a questionnaire with key stakeholders in your project about their best practicesCorrect answerPerform benchmarking by recommending best in class practices in the industry related to collecting requirements and defining productsBrainstorm among your team members to define the best practices for requirements gathering and product definitionTeach requirements analysis techniques to the project management teamOverall explanationAs the consultant has been hired for improvement advice, benchmarking is most appropriate. Benchmarking is the comparison of actual or planned products, processes, and practices to those of comparable organizations to identify best practices, generate ideas for improvement, and provide a basis for measuring performance. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 236. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 281.
Question 37:
During the Last sprint review, the main stakeholder complained that the product was missing many features they had been expecting. The project team argued that every incremental met the acceptance criteria and was approved by the main stakeholder. The cost performance index CPI of the project is 1.15 and the schedule performance index SPI is 1.43. What should the project manager do?
Ask the stakeholder to submit a change request to increase the budget and time for the modifications request
Explain to the stakeholder that since the acceptance criteria for every increment were met, the project can be closed
Ask the project team to perform the modifications since the project budget and schedule can support them
Analyze the reason for the gap in understanding with both sides and negotiate a solution
Ask the stakeholder to submit a change request to increase the budget and time for the modifications requestExplain to the stakeholder that since the acceptance criteria for every increment were met, the project can be closedAsk the project team to perform the modifications since the project budget and schedule can support themCorrect answerAnalyze the reason for the gap in understanding with both sides and negotiate a solutionOverall explanationWithout understanding the reason for the gap, the issue can occure again. So the correct answer is : Analyze the reason for the gap in understanding with both sides and negotiate a solution.
Question 38:
A team has been working on a project for several months,, but the completion date is unclear because the scope is changing frequently as new knowledge is gained. Some deliverables have already been completed, but when new stakeholders join the team, they complain that project outcomes are not meeting business goals. How can the project manager prevent this situation from happening in the future?
Schedule a kick-off meeting for every project phase to share the project management plan with all stakeholders
Schedule a daily meeting to review team performance and impediments
Create a prioritized backlog and define iteration review sessions with stakeholders
Create a detailed work breakdown structure (WBS) and milestone schedule approved by all stakeholders
Schedule a kick-off meeting for every project phase to share the project management plan with all stakeholdersSchedule a daily meeting to review team performance and impedimentsCorrect answerCreate a prioritized backlog and define iteration review sessions with stakeholders
Create a detailed work breakdown structure (WBS) and milestone schedule approved by all stakeholdersOverall explanationThe product owner should create a prioritized backlog and define iteration review sessions with stakeholders.
Question 39:
A team member shared with his functional manager some negative details about the performance of another team member that were discussed during the retrospective. The project manager finds out about this discussion. What actions should the project manager take? (Choose two)
Meet with the sponsor to review the situation
Meet with the entire team to review the ground rules about safe environments.
Contact with the team member to explain what information can be shared outside the team.
Meet with the product owner to talk about the situation.
Contact the team member’s functional manager and invite them to the next retrospective.
Meet with the sponsor to review the situation
Meet with the entire team to review the ground rules about safe environments.Correct selectionContact with the team member to explain what information can be shared outside the team.Meet with the product owner to talk about the situation.
Contact the team member’s functional manager and invite them to the next retrospective.
Overall explanationThe project manager should contact the team member to explain what information can be shared outside the team and meet with the entire team to review the ground rules about safe environments. The functional manager shouldnt be invited to the retrospective. The sponsor and the product owner has nothing to do with this situation. Agile PRactice Guide, Page 50.
Question 40:
A project manager has just taken over a project to develop a product using a hybrid life cycle. With this project, the hardware has fixed requirements while the software requirements are still evolving. How should the project manager apply the hybrid life cycle for this project?
Both the hardware and software should have their scope defined iteratively
Both the hardware and software should have their scope defined during initial project planning
Develop the hardware with a predictive life cycle and use an adaptive life cycle for the software
Develop the software with a predictive life cycle and use an adaptive life cycle for the hardware
Both the hardware and software should have their scope defined iteratively
Both the hardware and software should have their scope defined during initial project planning
Correct answerDevelop the hardware with a predictive life cycle and use an adaptive life cycle for the software
Develop the software with a predictive life cycle and use an adaptive life cycle for the hardwareOverall explanationThe question describes a project which is utilizing a hybrid development life cycle. A hybrid development life cycle is a combination of predictive and adaptive life cycles. In a predictive life cycle, the project scope, time, and cost are determined in the early phases of the life cycle. With an adaptive life cycle, the detailed scope is defined and approved before the start of an iteration. With a hybrid life cycle, those elements of the project that are well-known or have fixed requirements follow a predictive development life cycle, and those elements that are still evolving follow an adaptive development life cycle. In this scenario, the hardware has fixed requirements while the software requirements are still evolving. Therefore, the project manager should develop the hardware with a predictive life cycle and use an adaptive life cycle for the development of the software.
Question 41:
A company’s key product is evolving and requires the use of new technology. No one on the team is familiar with this technology; however, experienced developers on the team volunteered to study the concepts and application and believe they will be able to take full responsibility for the new technology. What should the project manager do?
Descope this requirement as the developers have more important tasks
Hire externally since the internal developers already have assigned work
Support the developers with their intention to learn the new technology
Outsource the technology work to a third party so as not to delay work
Descope this requirement as the developers have more important tasksHire externally since the internal developers already have assigned workCorrect answerSupport the developers with their intention to learn the new technologyOutsource the technology work to a third party so as not to delay workOverall explanationIn an agile environment, project managers are servant leaders, changing their mphasis to coaching people who want help, fostering greater collaboration on the team, and aligning stakeholder needs. As a servant leader, project managers encourage the distribution of responsibility to the team: to those people who have the knowledge to get work done. Agile Practice Guide, Page 38.
Question 42:
A supplier was supposed to mobilize a government-issued, licensed piece of equipment two days ago, but did not. The procurement manager was informed that the supplier failed to check the validity of the license, which expired last week. The supplier had already submitted an application to the authorities, but it generally takes one to three weeks to process the application, which will affect the critical path. Which action should the project manager take?
Review the terms of the contract in order to determine the next steps
Update the project team on the delay so that resources can be utilized elsewhere
Update the lessons learned register to serve as an input for future material transactions
Analyze the schedule and look for fast-tracking and crashing alternatives
Correct answerReview the terms of the contract in order to determine the next stepsUpdate the project team on the delay so that resources can be utilized elsewhereUpdate the lessons learned register to serve as an input for future material transactions
Analyze the schedule and look for fast-tracking and crashing alternatives
Overall explanationAfter contract signature, the project manager should refer to the terms and conditions of the contract to decide the next step.
Question 43:
During the execution of a maintenance project the contractor submits an offer for additional work. The project manager realizes that the activities billed are included in the initial scope of work. What should the project manager do next in this situation?
Review the project costs and communicate this to the project sponsor
Review the project scope and statement and negotiate with the contractor
Submit a change request to approve the offer
Refuse the offer as it is included in the initial project scope
Review the project costs and communicate this to the project sponsor
Correct answerReview the project scope and statement and negotiate with the contractorSubmit a change request to approve the offer
Refuse the offer as it is included in the initial project scope
Overall explanationProject scope is the work performed to deliver a product, service, or result with the specified features and functions. Project Scope Statement. The description of the project scope, major deliverables, and exclusions. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 246.
Question 44:
In your project, there is confusion amongst the project stakeholders on where to find materials and information for the project. What is the best response to address this issue?
Set up an information management system to store, share, and codify the project’s knowledge and content
Distribute all the project documents, materials, and updates to each stakeholder
Assign one project team member to retain and distribute all the project materials and information to have a single point of contact
Require all stakeholders to attend every meeting to ensure everyone receives the handouts and information
Correct answerSet up an information management system to store, share, and codify the project’s knowledge and contentDistribute all the project documents, materials, and updates to each stakeholderAssign one project team member to retain and distribute all the project materials and information to have a single point of contactRequire all stakeholders to attend every meeting to ensure everyone receives the handouts and informationOverall explanationAs a project progresses, there can be a lot of information and systems - especially in a large, complex project with many stakeholders. The root issue in this scenario is the inability of stakeholders to locate the materials and the information they need. Building up the information management tools would assist the project stakeholders to access and locate the information needed or requested. All other options describe infeasible, counterproductive, or unmanageable responses.
Question 45:
A project is ending and the final deliverables have been accepted by the customer. The project team is pleased that the project was a success, however, some groups within the customer’s organization believe the objective of the project was not met. What should the project manager have done to avoid this issue?
Identified key stakeholders and included all of them in project agreement discussions
Distributed a detailed quality management plan to the key stakeholders
Included the final report during the closing phase to ensure common understanding
Performed project reporting according to the communications management plan
Correct answerIdentified key stakeholders and included all of them in project agreement discussionsDistributed a detailed quality management plan to the key stakeholdersIncluded the final report during the closing phase to ensure common understandingPerformed project reporting according to the communications management planOverall explanationSince the final deliverables have been accepted by the customer but some groups within the customer’s organization believe the objective of the project was not met, so, in order to avoid this situation, the project manager should have Identified key stakeholders and included all of them in project agreement discussions.
Question 46:
You will be leading an agile project. The goal of the project is to optimize organizational workflows and reduce costs by at least 30%. Since everybody will be affected by this project, you need to consider a big number of project stakeholders. During the project, you would need some business decisions to be taken. Who makes business decisions on agile projects?
Product owner
End customer
Functional managers
Servant-leader
Correct answerProduct ownerEnd customer
Functional managers
Servant-leader
Overall explanationProduct owners make decisions on behalf of business stakeholders on Agile projects. Agile Practice Guide, Page 41
Question 47:
A certain stakeholder keeps asking for changes to the project scope that are not consistent with the original project requirements. One of the changes was requested one month before the project launch date. This change is projected to cause significant project delays. What should the project manager do?
Update the change management document
Continue with the launch date as per the approved project management plan
Inform the project steering committee about the project delay risk
Submit a change request to the change control board (CCB)
Update the change management documentContinue with the launch date as per the approved project management planInform the project steering committee about the project delay riskCorrect answerSubmit a change request to the change control board (CCB)Overall explanationKeyword ( changes to the project scope - cause significant project delays ). The project manager should Submit a change request to the change control board (CCB) for reviewing and approval.
Question 48:
Which of the following documents links product requirements from their origin to the deliverables that satisfy them and provides a structure for managing changes to the product scope?
Project charter
Risk register
Requirements documentation
Requirements tractability matrix
Project charterRisk registerRequirements documentationCorrect answerRequirements tractability matrixOverall explanationRequirements traceability matrix is a grid that links product requirements from their origin to the deliverables that satisfy them. OMBOK Guide 7, Page 189. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 148.
Question 49:
A team member missed a project meeting without it being approved and has been penalized as defined in the ground rules. This team member, as well as other team members, insisted that they were not aware of this rule regarding the project, and they didn’t agree with the penalty. What should the project manager have done to avoid this situation?
Ensured the team members are fully supportive of all decisions
Distributed the project charter to all team members
Ensured the team active participation in developing the project charter
Used a charismatic leadership style
Ensured the team members are fully supportive of all decisions
Distributed the project charter to all team members
Correct answerEnsured the team active participation in developing the project charterUsed a charismatic leadership style
Overall explanationThe team charter is a document that enables the team to establish its values, agreements, and practices as it performs its work together. Ideally the charter should be produced by the team, or at least with the team’s active participation.
Question 50:
You are managing a product development project, and you want to create a visual roadmap that aligns the project with the organization’s strategic goals. Which method should you use to develop this visual roadmap?
Net Promoter Score (NPS)
Modeling
Impact mapping
Timebox
Net Promoter Score (NPS)ModelingCorrect answerImpact mappingTimeboxOverall explanationImpact mapping is a strategic planning method used to create a visual roadmap for aligning product development with an organization’s strategic goals. It helps identify the impact of different features or components on the overall objectives. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 181.
Question 51:
A key project stakeholder who was a big supporter and motivator for the project team leaving the organization. The project team is experiencing low morale and poor teamwork. What should the project manager do to improve morale?
Build team connections and emotional bonds
Identify the wants and aspirations of the team
Set goals and push the team to achieve the goals
Forge consensus through team participation
Build team connections and emotional bondsCorrect answerIdentify the wants and aspirations of the teamSet goals and push the team to achieve the goalsForge consensus through team participationOverall explanationKeyword ( improve morale ). The project manager should Identify the wants and aspirations of the team to improve morale and poor teamwork.
Question 52:
Which of the following statements most accurately describes a typical project scenario?
Staffing peaks during the execution phase of a project
The influence of the stakeholders is the same all through the project
Changes in project scope during the initial phases of the project are very expensive
The next phase of a project should never start until the deliverables for the previous phase are completely reviewed and approved
Correct answerStaffing peaks during the execution phase of a projectThe influence of the stakeholders is the same all through the projectChanges in project scope during the initial phases of the project are very expensiveThe next phase of a project should never start until the deliverables for the previous phase are completely reviewed and approvedOverall explanationStaffing is typically highest during the execution phase of the project. The other three responses may not hold true. Projects can move forward into subsequent phases without the deliverables of the prior phase being completely approved; this is known as fast tracking. Changes during the initial phases of the project are the least expensive. The influence of the stakeholders is highest during the start of the project and declines as the project moves to completion. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 549.
Question 53:
An agile project is running its fifth iteration out of ten. After the last iteration review, the team members receive feedback from the security department about regulations with which the project must comply. Which two actions should the project manager take? (Choose two)
Ask the product owner to include the requirements in the product backlog
Ask the security department for details about regulations
Ask the stakeholders about the priority of this regulation
Ask the team members to include the requirements in the next iteration
Ask the team members to analyze the impact of including this regulation
Correct selectionAsk the product owner to include the requirements in the product backlog
Correct selectionAsk the security department for details about regulations
Ask the stakeholders about the priority of this regulation
Ask the team members to include the requirements in the next iteration
Ask the team members to analyze the impact of including this regulation
Overall explanationKeyword ( The project MUST comply with these regulations.), since this is a cumpulsory regulation, then you need to first Ask the security department for details about regulations , then Ask the product owner to include the requirements in the product backlog. Analysing the impact of the regulation may come after, since there is no way but to comply first.
Question 54:
During one of the Scrum meetings, the team identified that its velocity went down about 20% in the last iteration and they documented the root cause. Which Scrum meeting is the team attending?
Retrospective
Iteration planning
Daily standup
Iteration Review
Correct answerRetrospectiveIteration planning
Daily standupIteration Review
Overall explanationThe retrospective is a time for the team to learn from previous work and make small improvements. The retrospective is about looking at the qualitative (people’s feelings) and quantitative (measurements) data, then using that data to find root causes, designing countermeasures, and developing action plans. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 180, Agile Practice Guide, Page 50.
Question 55:
A project manager finished reviewing the project deliverables for the current iteration with the customer. A new key stakeholder who just joined the customer’s team, complains that the results do not provide the capabilities the business anticipated. What should the project manager do to address this issue?
Conduct stakeholder identification and a project objectives review session
Update the stakeholder list and fix the deliverables
Create a change request and update the scope management plan
Update the project management plan and lessons learned
Correct answerConduct stakeholder identification and a project objectives review session
Update the stakeholder list and fix the deliverables
Create a change request and update the scope management plan
Update the project management plan and lessons learned
Overall explanationBefore any action, the project manager should Conduct stakeholder identification and a project objectives review session because he is a new key stakeholder.
Question 56:
A customer has already signed off on a given deliverable. During later inspections, the project manager is informed that the deliverable does not conform to the local government’s regulations and that it was built this way due to an informal request from the customer. The customer denies this. What should be used to determine why the deliverable wasn’t compliant with government regulations?
Fishbone diagram
Matrix diagram
Project status reports
Control chart
Correct answerFishbone diagramMatrix diagramProject status reportsControl chartOverall explanationkeyword (why the deliverable wasn’t compliant with government regulations) fishbone diagrams, why-why diagrams, or Ishikawa diagrams helping to identify the main or root cause of the problem. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 293.
Question 57:
A project manager has heard about the large volume of emails the team receives each day, which prevents them from doing project work. One team member has stated that they would like to be able to access project-related information when needed. To what type of communication is the team member referring?
Mass communication
Pull communication
Interactive communication
Push communication
Mass communicationCorrect answerPull communication
Interactive communicationPush communicationOverall explanationPull communication. Used for large complex information sets, or for large audiences, and requires the recipients to access content at their own discretion subject to security procedures. These methods include web portals, intranet sites, e-learning, lessons learned databases, or knowledge repositories. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 13.
Question 58:
A quality defect on project deliverables. In Which Category are these risks included?
Commercial Risk
Management Risk
Technical Risk
External Risk
Commercial RiskManagement RiskCorrect answerTechnical Risk
External RiskOverall explanationQuality is categorized as a technical risk in the risk breakdown structure. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 406.
Question 59:
You are the project manager of a large IT project. During the implementation phase, you sign a contract to rent an additional server from a local company because of the possibility that the main server may fail due to constant, local-area electrical outages. As a project manager, what strategy are you using?
Avoid
Mitigate
Transfer
Escalate
Avoid Correct answerMitigateTransferEscalateOverall explanationIn risk mitigation, the action is taken to reduce the probability of occurrence and/or impact of a threat. the project manager wants to reduce the probability and impact by renting the generator. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 443.
Question 60:
You have identified a risk that may cause safety concerns for the workers completing the task. You’ve decided to hire a third party to complete this work because the risk is too great to accept internally. Which risk response is this?
Avoidance
Acceptance
Mitigation
Transference
AvoidanceAcceptanceMitigationCorrect answerTransferenceOverall explanationThe transfer involves shifting ownership of a threat to a third party to manage the risk and to bear the impact if the threat occurs. Agreements may be used to transfer ownership and liability for specified risks to another party. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 123.
Question 61:
A project manager is leading the development of a mobile banking application using a hybrid approach. The team has been holding daily standup meetings each workday morning. Due to an unexpected issue, 50% of the team has to work from home. The bank’s management directed the team not to have in-person daily standups. Various team members are complaining about this, stating that there is a lack of information sharing among the team. What should the project manager do?
Delegate authority to the team members and ask them to submit weekly status reports instead
Ask senior management for permission to hold in-person team meetings once each week
Postpone the daily standups and ask the team members to update the project manager daily via messaging
Hold virtual daily standups each workday morning and use collaboration tools to manage project updates
Delegate authority to the team members and ask them to submit weekly status reports insteadAsk senior management for permission to hold in-person team meetings once each weekPostpone the daily standups and ask the team members to update the project manager daily via messagingCorrect answerHold virtual daily standups each workday morning and use collaboration tools to manage project updatesOverall explanationHold virtual daily standups each workday morning and use collaboration tools to manage project updates. Daily stand-up meetings are required even if the team is not located in one geographical area.
Question 62:
A project manager is leading a software development project that will assist in maintenance management for a power plant. The project manager is analyzing project performance data and trying to forecast if the project will have any slippage in the future. What should the project manager do?
Perform root cause analysis (RCA)
Perform schedule analysis
Perform quality control analysis
Perform trend analysis
Perform root cause analysis (RCA)Perform schedule analysisPerform quality control analysisCorrect answerPerform trend analysisOverall explanationA trend analysis uses mathematical models to forecast future outcomes based on historical results. It examines project performance over time to determine if performance is improving or deteriorating. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 177, PMBOK Guide 6, Page 111.
Question 63:
You have developed a shortlist of vendors that have submitted bids for a project you are managing. One vendor has quoted USD $3.5 million, another vendor has quoted USD $4.2 million, and the final vendor has quoted USD $5.1 million. What is the most important thing to consider when selecting the winning bid?
How well the vendor meets the selection criteria and project requirements
Vendor experience
Price
Incentive payments such as early completion bonuses and late performance penalties
Correct answerHow well the vendor meets the selection criteria and project requirementsVendor experiencePriceIncentive payments such as early completion bonuses and late performance penaltiesOverall explanationHow well the vendor meets the formal vendor selection criteria and project requirements is the most important thing to consider. Price and experience may be listed as part of these criteria, but they are not the sole indicators of how well a vendor will perform. The PMI Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct requires project managers to attend to the the best interest of the project as a whole, as well as follow all project processes and policies, such as those regarding procurement.
Question 64:
A project manager is leading a team on a new software development project. The project is complex and challenging, and the team members are working long hours. The project manager notices that the team members are starting to become stressed and frustrated. What can the project manager do to help improve the team’s mood?
Implement a Kanban Board to track the team’s performance
Implement a mood chart to help track the team’s mood over time
Escalate to the project sponsor to solve
Ask their functional managers for their openion
Implement a Kanban Board to track the team’s performanceCorrect answerImplement a mood chart to help track the team’s mood over timeEscalate to the project sponsor to solveAsk their functional managers for their openionOverall explanationA mood chart can track the mood or reactions of a group of very important stakeholders—the project team. At the end of each day, project team members can use colors, numbers, or emojis to indicate their frame of mind. Tracking the project team’s mood or individual project team member’s moods can help to identify potential issues and areas for improvement. PMBOK guide 7, Page 103.
Question 65:
Agile practices promote dedicated team members. When this is not the case, team members must multitask and experience productivity losses. On average, what range of productivity loss occurs?
20 percent to 40 percent
50 percent to 75 percent
15 percent to 30 percent
0 percent to 10 percent
Correct answer20 percent to 40 percent
50 percent to 75 percent
15 percent to 30 percent0 percent to 10 percent
Overall explanationAccording to the Agile Practice Guide, team members who are not dedicated to an Agile team and who must context switch between tasks lose on average 20 percent to 40 percent productivity. Agile Practice Guide, Page 45.
Question 66:
A project manager has been assigned to a new project. There is one team member who never says anything during meetings. After meetings, however, the team member sends detailed emails with very good suggestions that help with project execution. How should the project manager guide the team members?
Motivate the team members to speak freely in the meeting
Remind the team members to follow the team charter
Review the communications management plan with the team members
Arrange a team-building activity to involve all team members
Correct answerMotivate the team members to speak freely in the meetingRemind the team members to follow the team charterReview the communications management plan with the team membersArrange a team-building activity to involve all team membersOverall explanationBecause one of the tasks of the project manager is to motivate the team, provide a positive environment, facilitate effective communication, Since the team member does not participate during the meetings but makes good suggestions, this indicates a lack of interactive communication skills, and here is the role of the project manager to motivate him and encourage him to develop his communication skill and be more integrated with the team.
Question 67:
A project team has been working together for about 2 years. One of the team members has consistently shown high performance and stood out among their peers during the execution of the project. How should the project manager recognize high performance?
Thank the team member privately to avoid conflict among the team members
Acknowledge the high-performing team member in the next team meeting
Choose a reward for the team member that aligns with their personal goals
Ask the sponsor to approve a bonus for the high-performing team member
Thank the team member privately to avoid conflict among the team membersAcknowledge the high-performing team member in the next team meetingCorrect answerChoose a reward for the team member that aligns with their personal goalsAsk the sponsor to approve a bonus for the high-performing team memberOverall explanationUnderstanding what motivates project team members and other stakeholders helps to tailor rewards to the individual, thereby eliciting more effective engagement. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 158.
Question 68:
A project manager for a large multiyear project has a project with diversified stakeholders from various geographical areas. Recently the project manager encountered an issue with stakeholder engagement. Which two tools should the project manager use to determine the underlying reason for why engagement is not having the planned effect? (Choose two)
Open space meeting
Five whys
Communication management plan
Issue log
Ishikawa diagram
Open space meetingCorrect selectionFive whysCommunication management planIssue logCorrect selectionIshikawa diagramOverall explanationKeywords ( two tools to determine the underlying reason). Ishikawa diagram : An effective way to identify the root cause. 5 Whys is a technique of identifying the root cause of a problem by repeatedly using the question Why. The answer for each Why becomes the driver for identifying the next Why. It provides a visual representation of the problem being analyzed. Very Important Question for real exam.
Question 69:
At the end of a project, the project manager was asked to provide a performance rating of the project team members. What should the project manager mainly make reference to?
Agreed-upon key performance indicators (KPIs)
Input from project stakeholders
Feedback from the project sponsor
Competencies of team members
Correct answerAgreed-upon key performance indicators (KPIs)Input from project stakeholders
Feedback from the project sponsor
Competencies of team members
Overall explanationKPI stands for key performance indicator, a quantifiable measure of performance over time for a specific objective. KPIs provide targets for teams to shoot for, milestones to gauge progress, and insights that help people across the organization make better decisions. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 95.
Question 70:
How often should retrospective meetings be held?
At the end of the project
At the end of each iteration
If the Development Team is delivering, retrospective meetings are not necessary.
Whenever the Development Team considers it necessary,
At the end of the projectCorrect answerAt the end of each iterationIf the Development Team is delivering, retrospective meetings are not necessary.Whenever the Development Team considers it necessary,Overall explanationRetrospective is the most important Agile projects practice. its a regularly occurring workshop in which participants explore their work and results in order to improve both process and product. Many teams use iterations to retrospect because the iteration prompts a demonstration and a retrospective at the end. and it enables the Development Team to inspect its processes, adapt them and thereby constantly improve. Agile Practice Guide, Page 51.
Question 71:
A construction company is executing a building contract that includes firm milestones for replacing certain components of the building. During execution, the client complains that the new components do not meet the requirements. What should the project manager have done to prevent this from happening?
Provided compensation for issues due to the variance in the agreed-upon requirements
Approved a detailed change management process before starting the build phase
Defined acceptance criteria in a quality checklist agreed upon before starting the build phase
Continuously communicated the changes in the work plan and the agreement to the client
Provided compensation for issues due to the variance in the agreed-upon requirementsApproved a detailed change management process before starting the build phaseCorrect answerDefined acceptance criteria in a quality checklist agreed upon before starting the build phaseContinuously communicated the changes in the work plan and the agreement to the clientOverall explanationA checklist is a structured tool, usually component-specific, used to verify that a set of required steps has been performed or to check if a list of requirements has been satisfied. Based on the project’s requirements and practices, checklists may be simple or complex. Quality checklists should incorporate the acceptance criteria included in the scope baseline. PMBOK GUide 6, Page 292.
Question 72:
You are managing a construction project, and you’ve set ambitious performance goals for your project team, including tight deadlines and cost targets. As the project progresses, your team continually fails to meet these goals, leading to frustration and demoralization among team members. Which pitfall of measurement is evident in this situation?
Hawthorne effect
Vanity metric
Confirmation bias
Demoralization
Hawthorne effectVanity metricConfirmation biasCorrect answerDemoralizationOverall explanationIn this scenario, the pitfall is “Demoralization.” Setting unrealistic or unachievable goals can lead to a drop in team morale as they continuously fail to meet these targets. While stretch goals are acceptable, it’s important to recognize and reward hard work and avoid setting goals that are demoralizing to the team. PMBOK Guide7, Page 112.
Question 73:
During a team meeting, the new agile project manager becomes aware that there are many complaints from the customer regarding project stability and other critical issues. A team member states that the deliverables were developed by experienced employees who confirmed that the project was stable. How should the new project manager address these concerns?
Ask the team for additional feedback and add tasks to the task board
Document the customer’s complaints and critical issues in the issue log
Hold a brainstorming session to identify the root cause of the complaints
Allow the agile team to decide what they are able to deliver In each iteration
Ask the team for additional feedback and add tasks to the task boardCorrect answerDocument the customer’s complaints and critical issues in the issue logHold a brainstorming session to identify the root cause of the complaintsAllow the agile team to decide what they are able to deliver In each iterationOverall explanationThe project manager should first document the customer’s complaints and critical issues in the issue log.
Question 74:
You are a project manager tasked with leading a major organizational change initiative. After identifying potential threats and opportunities that drive the need for change, you realize that there’s a lack of urgency and motivation among employees to embrace the change. What should you do next to align with the 8-Step Process for Leading Change?
Remove obstacles, including outdated processes
Create short-term wins to build momentum
Communicate the vision and benefits of the change
Identify influential people from various roles and create a vision statement
Remove obstacles, including outdated processesCreate short-term wins to build momentumCorrect answerCommunicate the vision and benefits of the changeIdentify influential people from various roles and create a vision statementOverall explanationStep 4 of the 8-Step Process for Leading Change involves communicating the vision and consistently demonstrating the urgency and benefits of the change. In this scenario, addressing the lack of urgency and motivation among employees requires effective communication to convey the vision and why the change is essential. PMBOK Guide7, Page 162.
Question 75:
In a hybrid project, a project team is facing a lot of obstacles and blockers from some stakeholders. As a project manager, what should you do to improve project performance?
Empower the team members to remove obstacles and blockers
Add blockers to the issue log and risk management plan
Ask stakeholders to communicate with the project manager and not directly with the team
Address and remove obstacles and blockers for the team
Empower the team members to remove obstacles and blockersAdd blockers to the issue log and risk management planAsk stakeholders to communicate with the project manager and not directly with the teamCorrect answerAddress and remove obstacles and blockers for the teamOverall explanationAs the project manager, you need to demonstrate the type of leadership that facilitates collaboration among the team and stakeholders, manages conflict, removes obstacles, and supports the team’s performance. Removing distraction, randomization, and other confusion enables the project team to be more effective and efficient. Project managers can take on most of the burden of addressing and removing impediments so the team can do their best work on the project to achieve its desired objectives.
Question 76:
You are working on a project where site workers often complain about working conditions, but the project manager cannot improve the conditions. Which interpersonal skills does the project manager lack?
Negotiation
Cultural awareness
Emotional intelligence
Political awareness
Correct answerNegotiationCultural awareness
Emotional intelligencePolitical awarenessOverall explanationWith negotiation skills, project and program managers can resolve these conflicts to ensure success is achieved with minimal risk to project objectives. Negotiation has helped resolve various issues in projects, organizations and the business domain. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 169.
Question 77:
You are the manager of a manufacturing plant with a large workforce engaged in repetitive tasks. You believe that most employees primarily work for income and are not highly ambitious. Which management theory and style are most suitable for this environment?
Theory Z, a focus on self-realization and values
Theory Y, an encouragement of creativity and discussion
Theory X, a hands-on and top-down approach
Theory Y, a personal coaching approach
Theory Z, a focus on self-realization and valuesTheory Y, an encouragement of creativity and discussionCorrect answerTheory X, a hands-on and top-down approachTheory Y, a personal coaching approachOverall explanationTheory X assumes that individuals work primarily for income and are not highly ambitious. The corresponding management style for Theory X is a hands-on and top-down approach, which is often seen in labor-intensive environments or those with many layers of management. PMBOK Guide7, Page 160.
Question 78:
Which of the following is one of the major challenges faced by an organization just beginning to use Agile approaches?
Daily standups could be viewed as time-intensive activities
Avoidance of multi-tasking introduces inefficiency
Agile approaches could be viewed as plan-driven
Iterative prototypes involve rework that could be viewed negatively
Daily standups could be viewed as time-intensive activitiesAvoidance of multi-tasking introduces inefficiencyAgile approaches could be viewed as plan-drivenCorrect answerIterative prototypes involve rework that could be viewed negativelyOverall explanationAgile approaches are not plan-driven and multi-tasking is inefficient due to the waste involved with task-switching. These are plain facts. Daily standups are short team meetings and are not time-intensive. One of the major problems faced by organizations new to Agile is rework related to prototyping and could be viewed negatively in the beginning. Agile Practice Guide, Page 73.
Question 79:
A company has an existing contract to maintain and enhance a client’s customer database. The company’s legal department informs the project manager that a new piece of legislation requiring stricter protection of customer information might soon be signed into law. The law will require additional security features to be implemented into the database the project manager is maintaining. These features are not included in the scope of the current contract. What should the project manager do?
Seek the project sponsor’s support to influence the client to amend the contract immediately
Update the risk register to include this issue and discuss the appropriate risk response plans with the project sponsor and client
Ask the legal department to raise the issue in the next contract negotiation with the customer
Wait until the legal requirements are finalized so the change in scope can be concretely defined
Seek the project sponsor’s support to influence the client to amend the contract immediatelyCorrect answerUpdate the risk register to include this issue and discuss the appropriate risk response plans with the project sponsor and clientAsk the legal department to raise the issue in the next contract negotiation with the customerWait until the legal requirements are finalized so the change in scope can be concretely definedOverall explanationSince the new legislation is not yet implemented, so this should be marked as risk not an issue. So, the project manager should update the risk register to include this issue and discuss the appropriate risk response plans with the project sponsor and client. A risk register is a repository in which outputs of risk management processes are recorded. Information in a risk register can include the person responsible for managing the risk, probability, impact, risk score, planned risk responses, and other information used to get a high-level understanding of individual risks. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 185.
Question 80:
A project is in the implementation phase and is managed using a hybrid approach. What should the project manager do to ensure full compliance of quality requirements during the execution phase?
Continually survey the quality of the deliverable
Set up quality policies and procedures
Plan quality management
Analyze the quality requirements
Correct answerContinually survey the quality of the deliverableSet up quality policies and proceduresPlan quality managementAnalyze the quality requirementsOverall explanationSince it is an execution phase, So “Continually survey the quality of the deliverable” is the correct answer. The rest of the answers are in the planning stage
Question 81:
During the execution of a project, big changes in enterprise environmental factors EEFs will severely reduce the implementation cost and reduce the project schedule. As a project manager, what should you do?
Give the team extra time to finish activities within the planned schedule
Decide how the remaining budget will be spent
Keep the extra budget as management reserve until project close out
Follow the communications management plan and project escalation policy.
Give the team extra time to finish activities within the planned scheduleDecide how the remaining budget will be spentKeep the extra budget as management reserve until project close outCorrect answerFollow the communications management plan and project escalation policy.
Overall explanationEEFs originate from the environment outside of the project and often outside of the enterprise. These factors refer to conditions, which are not under the control of the project team, that influence, constrain, or direct the project. EEFs may have an impact at the enterprise, portfolio, program, or project level. The implementation cost and the project schedule will be affected due to these changes. The project manager should Follow the communications management plan and project escalation policy to inform the key stakeholders.
Question 82:
A laboratory is launching a new product, defined to be executed in eight iterations with a fixed release date. At the beginning of the second iteration, the project manager realizes that a significant regulatory feature is missing in the project backlog. What should the project manager do?
Invite stakeholders to discuss the impact of adding the regulatory feature
Ask the product owner to add the missing feature in the backlog
Estimate the related cost and ask for a project extension
Increase the capacity of the team to include the missed feature
Invite stakeholders to discuss the impact of adding the regulatory featureCorrect answerAsk the product owner to add the missing feature in the backlogEstimate the related cost and ask for a project extensionIncrease the capacity of the team to include the missed featureOverall explanationSince this is a regulatory requirement then it has to be added. In agile, the product owners create the backlog for and with the team. Agile Practice Guide, Page 41.
Question 83:
A highly skilled team resource has received a job offer and will leave the project soon. What should the project manager do to maintain project performance while a new team member is being onboarded?
Log a risk in the risk register and work with the new team member to mitigate it
Motivate the new team member to perform.
Offer a cross-training and mentoring to the new team member
Share project documents with the new team member
Log a risk in the risk register and work with the new team member to mitigate it
Motivate the new team member to perform.
Correct answerOffer a cross-training and mentoring to the new team memberShare project documents with the new team member
Overall explanationCross-training is the practice of training your people to work in several different roles, or training them to do tasks that lie outside their normal responsibilities. Moreover, knowledge sharing is key aspect in projects. So the project manager should offer the new team member to be mentored by an old member as well.
Question 84:
Which of the following describes the most common phase-to-phase relationship in multi-phase projects?
Orderly
Finish-to-start
Non-overlapping
Sequential
OrderlyFinish-to-start
Non-overlapping
Correct answerSequentialOverall explanationThe phases may be sequential, iterative, or overlapping. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 19.
Question 85:
A development team has completed its first iteration for an important project. A burndown chart indicated that the project is behind schedule. Which actions should the project manager take to manage Impediments and improve the team’s velocity? (Choose two)
Empower the learn to make decisions to remove impediments
Look for processes that cause bottlenecks and slow down the team’s agility
Move the items with high complexity to the last iterations
Work with the team to remove impediments as quickly as possible
Assign the items with high complexity lo senior developers
Empower the learn to make decisions to remove impedimentsCorrect selectionLook for processes that cause bottlenecks and slow down the team’s agility
Move the items with high complexity to the last iterations
Correct selectionWork with the team to remove impediments as quickly as possible
Assign the items with high complexity lo senior developers
Overall explanationServant leaders manage relationships to build communication and coordination within the team and across the organization. These relationships help the leaders navigate the organization to support the team. This kind of support helps to remove impediments and facilitates the team to streamline its processes. Because servant leaders understand agile and practice a specific approach to agile, they can assist in fulfilling the team’s needs. Agile Practice Guide, Page 34.
Question 86:
A company that is introducing a new product into the market by the end of the year requires a storage and distribution facility to be built. During the monthly stakeholder meeting, it is discovered that the location for implementation is a government-owned area What should the project manager do first?
Identify an alternative site
Issue a change request
Update the issue log
Update the risk register
Identify an alternative siteIssue a change requestUpdate the issue logCorrect answerUpdate the risk registerOverall explanationThis is a risk not issue because the new product will be introduced into the market by the end of the year and there is a possibility to find another location. So the project manager should update the risk register first to identify the risk then analyze and set appropriate responses.
Question 87:
You are a project manager for an important project. The client will not agree to closure, claiming that the project team has not performed the code inspections mandated in the development contract. The project team has performed the code inspections. However, the records are not complete. What should the project manager do?
Hold a lessons learned workshop with the project team and project sponsor to avoid contractual compliance issues arising in future projects
Hold a meeting with the project team, project sponsor, and the client to agree to the further work required to close the project and add to lessons learned
Close the project and hand over the deliverables to the client
Seek expert legal advice on the interpretation of the clauses in the contract
Hold a lessons learned workshop with the project team and project sponsor to avoid contractual compliance issues arising in future projectsCorrect answerHold a meeting with the project team, project sponsor, and the client to agree to the further work required to close the project and add to lessons learnedClose the project and hand over the deliverables to the clientSeek expert legal advice on the interpretation of the clauses in the contractOverall explanationIn such scenario, its better to discuss the matter with all the parties involved in the acceptance as first thing to do, so you should Hold a meeting with the project team, project sponsor, and the client to agree to the further work required to close the project and add to lessons learned.
Question 88:
The project manager started a new project and wants to ensure that the team members and stakeholders are properly trained. After an interview with the team, the project manager found that his human resources had experience in different agile methodologies. What should the project manager do?
Make sure the project team is aware of all agile techniques
Skip the training because the team already understands agile
Teach one agile methodology fully and completely
Ensure the team has a common understanding of agile
Make sure the project team is aware of all agile techniques
Skip the training because the team already understands agile
Teach one agile methodology fully and completely
Correct answerEnsure the team has a common understanding of agileOverall explanationSince the human resources had experience in different agile methodologies, the project manager should ensure that the team has a common understanding of agile methodology used on his project.
Question 89:
A customer is concerned with the quality of the product delivery, as the production deployment is approaching. What should the project manager do next to ensure acceptance of the deliverables?
Evaluate the quality checklist for product compliance
Verify the production budget before advancing the product
Test product integration in accordance with the requirements
Review the approved exit criteria for the product
Correct answerEvaluate the quality checklist for product complianceVerify the production budget before advancing the productTest product integration in accordance with the requirementsReview the approved exit criteria for the productOverall explanationQuality Checklist is a structured tool used to verify that a set of required steps has been performed. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 718.
Question 90:
A large project requires new equipment to support the project execution. The procurement manager communicated to the project manager that the delivery of the newly purchased equipment will be delayed. The project manager is concerned that this will directly effect the project schedule. What should the project manager do next?
Validate the information and update the risk management plan
Update the sponsor of the potential issue and ask for any suggestions
Source second-hand equipment in order to prepare for any delivery delays
Update the risk register and discuss it with the project stakeholders
Validate the information and update the risk management planUpdate the sponsor of the potential issue and ask for any suggestionsSource second-hand equipment in order to prepare for any delivery delaysCorrect answerUpdate the risk register and discuss it with the project stakeholdersOverall explanationThe first action the project manager wil ltake is to update the risk register and discuss it with the project stakeholders.
Question 91:
You are leading a project in a complex environment with diverse stakeholders and various types of data available. To address the complexity, you decide to involve your project team in brainstorming sessions to explore different perspectives and open up new ways of understanding the system. Additionally, you choose to use both forecasting data and data reporting on the past to gain a comprehensive view. What aspect of complexity management are you primarily addressing in this scenario?
Delphi-like processes
Reframing through diversity
Risk identification
Balance in data usage
Delphi-like processesCorrect answerReframing through diversityRisk identificationBalance in data usageOverall explanationIn this scenario, you are primarily addressing the aspect of complexity management related to “reframing through diversity.” Complex systems often benefit from viewing them from diverse perspectives, which can be achieved through brainstorming sessions and opening up divergent ways of seeing the system. This approach helps in reframing the problem or situation to better understand and address complexity. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 121.
Question 92:
An organization is introducing agile to its projects. During an informal discussion, the project manager learned that the team members who are currently working on different teams were discussing how they would like to be on the same team. As a project manager, what should you do?
The project manager should not allow resources to choose teams because the project manager assigns the resources based upon project needs
The project manager should allow the resources to periodically choose on which team they would like to work
The project manager should not allow resources to choose on which team they would like to work because they will always choose their favorite team
The project manager should indicate that the team members have already been assigned to a team through workforce optimization
The project manager should not allow resources to choose teams because the project manager assigns the resources based upon project needsCorrect answerThe project manager should allow the resources to periodically choose on which team they would like to workThe project manager should not allow resources to choose on which team they would like to work because they will always choose their favorite teamThe project manager should indicate that the team members have already been assigned to a team through workforce optimizationOverall explanationThe project manager should allow the resources to periodically choose on which team they would like to work since agile team should be self-organizing. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 249, Agile Practice Guide, Page 101.
Question 93:
A project manager and project team are developing a strategic approach to engage the internal and external stakeholders. Which approach should be followed?
Analyze both internal and external stakeholders and develop a customized engagement strategy for each stakeholder
Schedule status meetings with all stakeholders to allow their participation in all project discussions and reports
Involve only the internal stakeholders, as the external stakeholders should not have access to confidential information
Classify all high-risk stakeholders and request that the project sponsor communicate directly with them
Correct answerAnalyze both internal and external stakeholders and develop a customized engagement strategy for each stakeholderSchedule status meetings with all stakeholders to allow their participation in all project discussions and reportsInvolve only the internal stakeholders, as the external stakeholders should not have access to confidential informationClassify all high-risk stakeholders and request that the project sponsor communicate directly with themOverall explanationThe project manager should analyze both internal and external stakeholders and develop a customized engagement strategy for each stakeholder. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 250.
Question 94:
Which of the following are main events of Scrum Framework?
Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Daily Scrum Meeting.
Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Daily XP Meeting.
Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Daily Kanban Meeting.
Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Mid-Sprint Status Review Meeting.
Correct answerSprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Daily Scrum Meeting.
Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Daily XP Meeting.
Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Daily Kanban Meeting.
Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting , Sprint Review Meeting, and Mid-Sprint Status Review Meeting.Overall explanationThe main events are defined by the Scrum Framework: Sprint Planning Meeting, Sprint Retrospective Meeting, Sprint Review Meeting, and Daily Scrum Meeting. Agile Practice Guide, Page 101
Question 95:
You have been assigned to lead an agile project. You want to ensure that project information is shared within and across the organization, so that any misalignments, dependencies, or other issues related to the frequently changing requirements are surfaced as quickly as possible. How could this goal be best achieved?
By sharing comprehensive documentation
By distributing the project report weekly
By promoting aggressive transparency
By inviting stakeholders to daily standups
By sharing comprehensive documentationBy distributing the project report weeklyCorrect answerBy promoting aggressive transparencyBy inviting stakeholders to daily standupsOverall explanationIn order to accelerate the sharing of information within and across the organization, agile methods promote aggressive transparency. Inviting stakeholders to project meetings and reviews or posting project artifacts in public spaces would help surface any misalignments, dependencies, or other issues related to the frequently changing project. Agile Practice Guide, Page 95.
Question 96:
During the early phase of a project, the requirements documentation was not approved. It was identified that the leader of a user party was not included in any of the requirements collection communications. Which of the documents was likely missed or outdated?
Stakeholder Register
Project Charter
Business Documentation
Risk Register
Correct answerStakeholder Register
Project Charter
Business Documentation
Risk Register
Overall explanationstakeholder register records information about project stakeholders, which includes an assessment and classification of project stakeholders. PMBOK Guide7, Page 185.
Question 97:
During which project stage are risk and stakeholders’ ability to influence project outcomes the highest?
Initiating
Planning
Executing
Monitoring and Controlling
Correct answerInitiatingPlanningExecutingMonitoring and ControllingOverall explanationThe Initiating stage is where stakeholders have the greatest ability to influence outcomes of the project. Risk is highest during this stage because of the high degree of unknown factors.
Question 98:
In the middle of a software development project, the lead design programmer accepted an offer from a competitor. The project manager needs to find a replacement to meet an upcoming milestone. What should the project manager do?
Consult the risk response plan
Issue a request to the change control board (CCB)
Assign the tasks to another team member
Update the resource calendar
Consult the risk response planIssue a request to the change control board (CCB)Assign the tasks to another team memberCorrect answerUpdate the resource calendarOverall explanationResource calendar shows Team member availability. Used to track when resources are available and how much time they have to work on a task. Resource calendar should also take into account any: Public holidays, Non working days, Days when project team members will be unavailable (due to vacation time, planned time off, leaves of absence, etc), along with any competing work priorities if the project team members are not fully dedicated to your project initiative. The Resources Calendars are continually updated during the planning and executing processes to reflect the changes in project environment and project team availability. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 323.
Question 99:
You are the project manager for a software development project with a tight deadline. The project team consists of highly skilled developers and designers. As the project progresses, you notice that some team members are consistently delaying their tasks until the last minute, which is causing stress and potential project delays. What project management concept is being exemplified in this situation?
The Hawthorne Effect
Parkinson’s Law
The Peter Principle
The Student Syndrome
The Hawthorne EffectParkinson’s LawThe Peter PrincipleCorrect answerThe Student SyndromeOverall explanationIn the scenario described, where team members consistently delay their tasks until the last minute, the project management concept being exemplified is the “Student Syndrome.” The Student Syndrome refers to the tendency of team members to procrastinate or delay their work until it is absolutely necessary, similar to how students often wait until the last moment to complete their assignments. This behavior can be detrimental to project timelines and outcomes
Question 100:
The project deliverables will be developed incrementally over Seven iterations. A new team member is wondering what approach will be used to accept the deliverables. How should the project manager respond?
The deliverables will be tested and accepted as part of iteration retrospectives.
The deliverables will be reviewed and accepted incrementally throughout the project.
The deliverables will be reviewed and accepted as part of the project closure activities.
The deliverables will be accepted by end-users at the end of the project.
The deliverables will be tested and accepted as part of iteration retrospectives.
Correct answerThe deliverables will be reviewed and accepted incrementally throughout the project.The deliverables will be reviewed and accepted as part of the project closure activities.The deliverables will be accepted by end-users at the end of the project.
Overall explanationIn agile projects, the deliverables are produced incrementally with every iteration, the development team demonstrates the completed deliverables at the regularly scheduled iteration reviews. The deliverables are reviewed by the product owner and other relevant stakeholders and either accepted or rejected. Agile Practice Guide, Page 19.
Question 101:
A project manager prepared a project benefits management plan. Which of the following should be included in this document?
Project requirements, target benefits, issue log, metrics
Target benefits, benefits owner, lessons learned
Strategic alignment, benefits owner, risk register
Target benefits, strategic alignment, time frame for realizing benefits
Project requirements, target benefits, issue log, metrics
Target benefits, benefits owner, lessons learned
Strategic alignment, benefits owner, risk register
Correct answerTarget benefits, strategic alignment, time frame for realizing benefits
Overall explanationThe benefits management plan includes the target benefits, such as net present value calculations, timeframe for realizing benefits, and the metrics associated with the benefits. PMPOK Guide 6, Page 251.
Question 102:
An agile project is running its second of six iterations. One new team member who does not have agile experience has just joined the team. In the daily meetings, the project manager observes that the team is having problems meeting their goals. What should the project manager do?
Provide feedback to the team and conduct a meeting to review the team rules
Provide feedback to the team and coach the new team member in agile methodology
Provide feedback to the team and request agile training for the new member
Provide feedback to the team and conduct a retrospective meeting to find a root cause
Provide feedback to the team and conduct a meeting to review the team rulesProvide feedback to the team and coach the new team member in agile methodologyProvide feedback to the team and request agile training for the new memberCorrect answerProvide feedback to the team and conduct a retrospective meeting to find a root causeOverall explanationIt was not mentioned in the question that the problem is due to the new team member joining, so you as a project manager must know the root cause to prevent the problem from repeating in the next iterations. So the correct answer is: Provide feedback to the team and conduct a retrospective meeting to find a root cause.
Question 103:
The product owner meets with the project team members to discuss the user stories for the next iteration. The product owner points out the user stories that hold the highest value, while the team indicates which user stories bear the highest risk. By the end of the meeting, the user stories in the iteration backlog are prioritized, and the team knows how to develop them. What process have the product owner and the team just performed?
Develop Schedule
Backlog refinement
Iteration planning
Stakeholders analysis
Develop ScheduleCorrect answerBacklog refinementIteration planningStakeholders analysisOverall explanationDiscussing the value of the user stories and the risk associated with them, eventually resulting in a prioritized backlog, can be best described by backlog refinement. Backlog refinement is the progressive elaboration of project requirements (user stories) in which the team and relevant stakeholders, such as the product owner, collaboratively review and update the requirements to satisfy customer needs. An iteration backlog is typically prioritized based on the value a user story represents for the customer combined with the risk associated with the user story. An outcome is a prioritized iteration backlog. As the work progresses, the product owner, together with the team, works with the stakeholders to prioritize the product backlog, identify new items, refine existing items, and clean up items that are no longer needed. This process is called backlog refinement and must be performed continuously throughout the project. Backlog refinement is also referred to as backlog grooming. Agile Practice Guide, Page(s) 52-53.
Question 103:
The product owner meets with the project team members to discuss the user stories for the next iteration. The product owner points out the user stories that hold the highest value, while the team indicates which user stories bear the highest risk. By the end of the meeting, the user stories in the iteration backlog are prioritized, and the team knows how to develop them. What process have the product owner and the team just performed?
Develop Schedule
Backlog refinement
Iteration planning
Stakeholders analysis
When all the items in the Product Backlog achieve the Definition of Done.
Correct answerWhen the fixed time allocated to the Sprint runs out.
When all tasks in the Sprint Backlog are complete.
When the Product Owner determines that the Sprint is finished.
Overall explanationSprint is a time boxed iteration in Scrum, so the Sprint is finished when the fixed time allocated to the Sprint runs out. Agile Practice Guide, Page 154.
Question 103:
The product owner meets with the project team members to discuss the user stories for the next iteration. The product owner points out the user stories that hold the highest value, while the team indicates which user stories bear the highest risk. By the end of the meeting, the user stories in the iteration backlog are prioritized, and the team knows how to develop them. What process have the product owner and the team just performed?
Develop Schedule
Backlog refinement
Iteration planning
Stakeholders analysis
Correct answerRecommend to lead the project using a hybrid project management approachAdopt an XP framework since it is agile, but team members work independentlySelect a predictive approach to avoid conflict among the team membersApply an agile project management approach as requested by the sponsorOverall explanation”A hybrid approach would provide the opportunity for early revenue generation through incremental delivery as requested by the sponsor while allowing the project team members to work independently with individually assigned tasks.
Question 103:
The product owner meets with the project team members to discuss the user stories for the next iteration. The product owner points out the user stories that hold the highest value, while the team indicates which user stories bear the highest risk. By the end of the meeting, the user stories in the iteration backlog are prioritized, and the team knows how to develop them. What process have the product owner and the team just performed?
Develop Schedule
Backlog refinement
Iteration planning
Stakeholders analysis
Correct answerCheck the resource management plan
Review RACI chart
Review the organizational process assets
Review the Stakeholder register
Overall explanationThe resource management plan provides guidance on various aspects of team development including disciplinary actions as a result of team performance assessments. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 186, PMBOK Guide 6, Page 318.
Question 104:
When is a Sprint finished?
When all the items in the Product Backlog achieve the Definition of Done.
When the fixed time allocated to the Sprint runs out.
When all tasks in the Sprint Backlog are complete.
When the Product Owner determines that the Sprint is finished.
Correct answerRequest that the team identifies, documents, and registers the issues to locate the source of the problemsRequest that a senior subject matter expert (SME) be hired to analyze and solve the problemsAsk the team to commit to a new date to fix all the problems and proceed with a change request to adjust the baselineEvaluate the cost and schedule variance in order to determine how much the project is off trackOverall explanationIf you do not identify the root cause of the problem, the problem will recur frequently. The main problem here is that the problems were not recorded and analyzed, and the root causes were not identified. As a result, the project was delayed. So the project manager should Request that the team identifies, documents, and registers the issues to locate the source of the problems. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 177.
Question 105:
Your software development project is in initiation. The sponsor wants to take advantage of early revenue from incremental delivery and pushes to use an agile approach. However, the team is strongly opposed to agile due to strife among the team members. They insist on a predictive approach so they can work independently with individual task assignments. What is your best course of action to address these conflicts?
Recommend to lead the project using a hybrid project management approach
Adopt an XP framework since it is agile, but team members work independently
Select a predictive approach to avoid conflict among the team members
Apply an agile project management approach as requested by the sponsor
Ask to replace some team members with more experienced onesUpdate the issue log and escalate it to the project sponsorCorrect answerMeet with the team to review internal actions to resolve the situationAsk the technical manager to help the team with the issueOverall explanationIn an agile environment, project managers are servant leaders, changing their emphasis to coaching people who want help, fostering greater collaboration on the team, and aligning stakeholder needs. Agile Practice Guide, Page 38.
Question 106:
One developer’s productivity is lacking compared with the others due to repetitive attendance issues. What should the project manager do to determine the appropriate disciplinary actions specific to this project?
Check the resource management plan
Review RACI chart
Review the organizational process assets
Review the Stakeholder register
Control chartCorrect answerMilestone chartCritical chain diagramCritical path methodOverall explanationMilestone chart is used to present project status to senior management. A milestone chart displays only the key deliverables and is simple and easy to understand.
Question 107:
A project is delayed due to multiple problems discovered during the quality review. Every time the team addresses one problem, additional problems are encountered. This is frustrating for both the project team and the project sponsor, who are driven to meet the dates and results expected by the organization. What should the project manager do?
Request that the team identifies, documents, and registers the issues to locate the source of the problems
Request that a senior subject matter expert (SME) be hired to analyze and solve the problems
Ask the team to commit to a new date to fix all the problems and proceed with a change request to adjust the baseline
Evaluate the cost and schedule variance in order to determine how much the project is off track
LeadershipConflict Management
NegotiationCorrect answerInfluencingOverall explanationInfluencing is an interpersonal skill that involves awareness of, and consideration for, the various perspectives in any situation. It helps you gather relevant and critical information in order to address changing project priorities and resolve unexpected project challenges. It is often used in conjunction with the Situational Awareness interpersonal tool. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 350.
Question 108:
A project team has finished its first iteration out of six. The iteration’s delivery performance (velocity) was 50%. During the iteration retrospective, the team realizes that the complexity of the work was underestimated. What should the project manager do?
Ask to replace some team members with more experienced ones
Update the issue log and escalate it to the project sponsor
Meet with the team to review internal actions to resolve the situation
Ask the technical manager to help the team with the issue
Organize a demonstration of the changes in the enterprise systemFacilitate a daily standup with the team to track the implementation of changesRequest that all team members think of ideas to improve processesCorrect answerDocument the lessons learned and implement improvements in the next sprintOverall explanationDocument the lessons learned and implement improvements in the next sprint. Sprint Retrospective: A meeting of the team members facilitated by the Scrum Master for the team to identify its own improvements. Where a Sprint review reviews the product and identified improvements, the retrospective reviews the team’s processes and practices and is used to identify ways the team can improve its performance, collaboration.
Question 109:
During a presentation to management, you want to display the project schedule with only the key deliverables displayed. What is the correct tool for this purpose?
Control chart
Milestone chart
Critical chain diagram
Critical path method
Call a meeting with your project sponsor and project management team to discuss potential training requirements for your project team membersAgree with your team members and let them know that no more time will be spent on discussing risks in the project status meetings unless required in the futureEscalate to your senior management that some of your team members do not agree with your risk management practicesCorrect answerTalk to your team members about the importance of risk managementOverall explanationProject risk management should be an agenda item at periodic status meetings. The amount of time required for that item will vary depending on the risks that have been identified, their priority, and difficulty of planning an appropriate response. But completely avoiding discussion on project risks is not advisable. Organizations should be committed to addressing risks proactively throughout the project life cycle.
Question 110:
Situational Awareness is a key interpersonal skill for all effective project managers and means knowing what is going on around you and being able to quickly switch your focus. What another skill is often used in conjunction with Situational Awareness where you the project manager, have to be persuasive in expressing your point and position in order for your project team and stakeholders to react quickly to changing project priorities?
Leadership
Conflict Management
Negotiation
Influencing
Net present value (NPV)Planned benefits delivery compared to actual benefits deliveryBenefit-cost ratioCorrect answerReturn on investment (ROI)Overall explanationReturn on investment (ROI) measures the amount of financial return compared to the cost of an investment, in this case, the project. It provides insights into whether it makes sense to continue investing organizational resources in the project. Calculating ROI at different points in the project’s lifecycle allows for ongoing evaluation of its financial performance. PMBOK Guide7, Page 102.
Question 111:
A company uses a hybrid approach to project management and has just completed the first sprint . A team member provided ideas to improve the testing process during the sprint retrospective. What is the next step for the project manager?
Organize a demonstration of the changes in the enterprise system
Facilitate a daily standup with the team to track the implementation of changes
Request that all team members think of ideas to improve processes
Document the lessons learned and implement improvements in the next sprint
Identify any training gaps
Update the issue logRequest the project management office (PMO) for a team of mentorsCorrect answerAllocate time to mentor the team
Overall explanationA type of leadership style used in agile and other types of projects which encourages the self definition, self-discovery, and self-awareness of team members by listening, coaching, and providing an environment that allows them to grow. PMBOK Guide7, Page 26.
Question 112:
As a project manager, you know the importance of risk management. You always try to include risk management as an agenda item in your status meetings. Some of your project team members complain that discussing risk management issues in status meetings is a waste of time because none of the risks identified on the project so far have actually occurred. What should you do in this situation?
Call a meeting with your project sponsor and project management team to discuss potential training requirements for your project team members
Agree with your team members and let them know that no more time will be spent on discussing risks in the project status meetings unless required in the future
Escalate to your senior management that some of your team members do not agree with your risk management practices
Talk to your team members about the importance of risk management
Correct answerDetermine if the activity is on the critical path.Use schedule compression to get the project back on track.Calculate the amount of free float for the activityAdjust the Gantt chart for the work package.Overall explanationThe project manager should FIRST Determine if the activity is on the critical path. As an example, if the activity will be delayed by an additional three weeks and have a float of 4 weeks so no action need to be taken since the activity is delayed within its float. If it is on the critical path then there is no float and the Project Manager needs to take an immediate action.
Question 113:
Your organization is in the middle of a complex IT project that is expected to deliver significant financial benefits. You want to assess the financial return compared to the project’s cost at various points in its lifecycle. Which metric should you use to measure this financial return and make informed decisions about resource allocation?
Net present value (NPV)
Planned benefits delivery compared to actual benefits delivery
Benefit-cost ratio
Return on investment (ROI)
The contract hasn’t been appropriately reviewed by the project teamThe stakeholder engagement plan has not been correctly implementedThe project manager does not have enough knowledge on this legal matterCorrect answerThe legal department has not disseminated the law correctly to all staffOverall explanationThe project manager does not have to be a trained expert in procurement management laws and regulations. The legal department is responsible for disseminating the law correctly to all staff.
Question 114:
The project sponsor recently requested that a vendor begins working toward adopting a hybrid approach. In response, the vendor hired a project manager experienced in agile for the project. What does that project manager need to do to make the team work in a collaborative way?
Identify any training gaps
Update the issue log
Request the project management office (PMO) for a team of mentors
Allocate time to mentor the team
The team that completes the most stories selected from the sprint backlog
Correct answerThe team with the least amount of defects in their deliverables
Team B as they have calculated more story points than team ATeam A as they have calculated fewer story points than team B.
Overall explanationThe team with the least amount of defects in their deliverables is performing better because this means the stories are completed and tested and ready to customer use.
Question 115:
During the project execution, the site supervisor informed the Project manager that specific activity was not executed on time and will be delayed by an additional three weeks. The project manager is concerned that this might impact project completion. What should the project manager do first?
Determine if the activity is on the critical path.
Use schedule compression to get the project back on track.
Calculate the amount of free float for the activity
Adjust the Gantt chart for the work package.
Restrict team members from sending the requirements documents via emailUpdate the communications management plan to ensure correct delivery of the latest versionEncourage better team communication by positioning team members closer togetherCorrect answerImplement a project management information system (PMIS)Overall explanationProject management information systems can ensure that stakeholders can easily retrieve the information they need in a timely way. Project information is managed anddistributed using a variety of tools, including: Electronic project management tools. Project management software, meeting and virtual office support software, web interfaces, specialized project portals and dashboards, and collaborative work management tools. Electronic communications management. Email, fax, and voice mail; audio, video and web conferencing; and websites and web publishing. Social media management. Websites and web publishing; and blogs and applications, which offer the opportunity to engage with stakeholders and form online communities. PMBOK Guide6, Page 95.
Question 116:
You are a project manager for a maintenance project. The contract is renewed annually. The project started 5 years ago. After contract renewal this year, the auditor reported that this version of the contract violates a new law that was passed last year. What has happened in this situation?
The contract hasn’t been appropriately reviewed by the project team
The stakeholder engagement plan has not been correctly implemented
The project manager does not have enough knowledge on this legal matter
The legal department has not disseminated the law correctly to all staff
DemoralizationCorrect answerVanity metricConfirmation biasHawthorne effectOverall explanationA vanity metric is a measure that shows data but does not provide useful information for making decisions. Measuring pageviews of a website is not as useful asmeasuring the number of new viewers. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 112.
Question 117:
A project manager is struggling to figure out the performance of the project teams in an agile environment for the same scope of work, team A has calculated 100 story points and team B has calculated 125 story points. Which team is performing better?
The team that completes the most stories selected from the sprint backlog
The team with the least amount of defects in their deliverables
Team B as they have calculated more story points than team A
Team A as they have calculated fewer story points than team B.
Collect requirementCorrect answerDecomposition
Preparing the Network diagramResource leveling
Overall explanationDecomposition Is a technique used for dividing and subdividing the project scope and project deliverables into smaller, more manageable parts. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 158, PMBOK Guide 7, Page 239.
Question 118:
A project team member complained to the project manager that they are not sure about the latest requirements document because it was emailed to them about one week ago. They mentioned that in the past they worked on a document for more than 20 hours only to find out later that another team member had already updated that same document but did not send them the latest revisions. What should the project manager do to avoid this situation in the future?
Restrict team members from sending the requirements documents via email
Update the communications management plan to ensure correct delivery of the latest version
Encourage better team communication by positioning team members closer together
Implement a project management information system (PMIS)
InfluencingNetworkingConflict management
Correct answerEmotional intelligenceOverall explanationEmotional intelligence or EI is the ability to understand and manage your own emotions, and those of the people around you. People with a high degree of emotional intelligence know what they’re feeling, what their emotions mean, and how these emotions can affect other people. Agile Practice Guide, Page 36, PMBOK Guide 7, Page 25.
Question 119:
Your client asked you to track his website performance. During the first meeting, you informed him that you should focus on measuring the number of new viewers instead of measuring page views, since measuring the page views shows data but does not provide useful information for making decisions. In this scenario, measuring page views is an example of:
Demoralization
Vanity metric
Confirmation bias
Hawthorne effect
Explain to the sponsor why the change is required and get their support in forcing the project team member to accept the new change
Correct answerArrange a meeting with the project team member and project sponsor to discuss the change and obtain consensus
Schedule a meeting with the project team member’s functional manager and request the functional manager’s support
Discuss how to manage this conflict with the project management office (PMO) and let them decide how to resolve the issue
Overall explanationThe project manager should arrange a meeting with the project team member and the project sponsor to discuss the change and obtain consensus.
Question 120:
A project charter has been approved and the project manager has been assigned to the project. The project manager is currently working with the project team to subdivide the project work packages. What is the project manager doing?
Collect requirement
Decomposition
Preparing the Network diagram
Resource leveling
Stakeholder engagement plan
Project management plan
Correct answerStakeholder register
Communications management plan
Overall explanationThe stakeholder register should be updated because it includes: The organizational position, location and contact details, and role on the project. Major requirements, expectations, potential for influencing project outcomes, and the phase of the project life cycle where the stakeholder has the most influence or impact. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 514.
Question 121:
One team member is not as active as the rest of the team during a brainstorming session. The project manager has a separate conversation with the team member and learns that the team member is slightly hearing impaired. The team member appreciates the project manager’s concern. The project manager then decides to change the time and location of the meeting to ensure everyone can participate. What interpersonal skill did the project manager use?
Influencing
Networking
Conflict management
Emotional intelligence
Building in resiliencePreparing for multiple outcomesCorrect answerSet-based designGathering informationOverall explanationIn this scenario, you are primarily employing the approach of “set-based design.” Set-based design involves investigating multiple designs or alternatives early in the project to reduce uncertainty. It allows the project team to explore options, consider trade-offs, and learn from working with various alternatives. Ineffective or suboptimal alternatives are discarded throughout the process. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 119.
Question 122:
A project team member was unhappy with a new change in project governance and complained to one of the project sponsors. The project sponsor challenged the project manager. How should the project manager resolve this conflict?
Explain to the sponsor why the change is required and get their support in forcing the project team member to accept the new change
Arrange a meeting with the project team member and project sponsor to discuss the change and obtain consensus
Schedule a meeting with the project team member’s functional manager and request the functional manager’s support
Discuss how to manage this conflict with the project management office (PMO) and let them decide how to resolve the issue
Hire an external company to add an additional layer of testing, making sure that the final product is well inspected before releasingCorrect answerUse the retrospective meeting to better understand the root cause of the quality problems and put together a plan with the team to address the problems
Seek extra funding approval with the sponsor to replace junior team members for more experienced ones
Create a reward system granting incentives to the team members who are able to catch more defects
Overall explanationIn order to determine the cause of an issue, it is appropriate to engage the team in determining what could be causing the issue. Discussing with the team during the iteration retrospective is an appropriate way to look for causes and remedies. An iteration retrospective is an excellent venue for discussing both what is and isn’t working. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 180, Agile Practice Guide, Page 50.
Question 123:
A project manager is leading a project with several stakeholders in other functional areas of the company. One of these stakeholders has just been promoted to lead another functional area, and remains a stakeholder for this project. What should the project manager have the project team update to ensure proper communications to stakeholders?
Stakeholder engagement plan
Project management plan
Stakeholder register
Communications management plan
Outsourcing work to a specialized technology firmCorrect answerConducting alternatives analysis to evaluate different ways to meet project objectivesAllocating cost reserve to cover potential budget overrunsUsing schedule reserve to accommodate changes in technologyOverall explanationIn a situation where technological advancements introduce volatility to the project, conducting alternatives analysis is a valuable approach. This analysis allows you to explore different ways to meet project objectives, adapt to evolving technologies, and make informed decisions. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 122.
Question 124:
You are managing a high-profile construction project, and the weather in your project location is notoriously unpredictable, leading to uncertainty in project scheduling. To address this uncertainty, you decide to explore multiple design alternatives early in the project to reduce uncertainty and consider trade-offs. What approach are you primarily employing in this scenario?
Building in resilience
Preparing for multiple outcomes
Set-based design
Gathering information
Inform the client about the changeRevise the project scheduleCorrect answerPresent the project to the stakeholderUpdate the risk register with a new riskOverall explanationThe project manager should present the project to the stakeholder. When a new stakeholder joins the board of directors and is impacting the project’s progress, it’s crucial for the project manager to ensure that the stakeholder is fully informed about the project, its objectives, and its current status. By presenting the project to the stakeholder, the project manager can ensure that the stakeholder is aware of the project’s goals, timelines, and deliverables, and that they understand the impact that their decisions may have on the project. This will help the project manager to manage the stakeholder’s expectations and ensure that their influence on the project is aligned with the project’s goals. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 33.
Question 125:
A software development project following an agile approach is facing quality issues with every release, causing many development problems. What should the project manager do to fix the problem and improve the quality?
Hire an external company to add an additional layer of testing, making sure that the final product is well inspected before releasing
Use the retrospective meeting to better understand the root cause of the quality problems and put together a plan with the team to address the problems
Seek extra funding approval with the sponsor to replace junior team members for more experienced ones
Create a reward system granting incentives to the team members who are able to catch more defects
Communicate with an officer in the environmental protection department to check if it is necessaryOrganize a meeting with the team and update the work breakdown structure (WBS)Raise this issue, and review and update the progress report for the next monthly project meetingCorrect answerStart the organization’s change control process via a change requestOverall explanationKeyword (not included in the project scope). The project manager should follow the change control process to get approval and update the scope baseine.
Question 126:
You are managing a software development project in an industry known for rapid technological advancements. Your team is concerned about the unpredictability of new technologies that could impact the project’s scope and requirements. Which approach should you consider to address the volatility associated with technological advancements in this scenario?
Outsourcing work to a specialized technology firm
Conducting alternatives analysis to evaluate different ways to meet project objectives
Allocating cost reserve to cover potential budget overruns
Using schedule reserve to accommodate changes in technology
Review the risk management plan.
Confirm which templates the team should be using.
Correct answerReview the project goal with the team.
Perform a stakeholder evaluation.
Overall explanationIn order to realign the project with the sponsor’s expectations, the project manager should Review the project goal with the team.
Question 127:
In the middle of the execution phase for a big project, a new stakeholder who was unfamiliar with the project joined the board of directors and is influencing the decisions made in the project. This change is impacting the project’s progress. What should the project manager do first?
Inform the client about the change
Revise the project schedule
Present the project to the stakeholder
Update the risk register with a new risk
The project manager should have researched the lessons learned register for knowledge gained throughout similar past projectsThe project manager could not have avoided this situation since it is impossible to determine in advance the effectiveness of a risk responseCorrect answerThe project manager should have researched the lessons learned repository for knowledge gained throughout similar past projectsThe project manager should have applied the avoidance risk response strategy because the risk had been seen before in past projectsOverall explanationIn this situation, a risk response was implemented and found to be ineffective for the current project. As it turns out, the same risk response was applied during a similar past project and experienced the same result. It is not enough to select a risk response strategy; the project manager also needs to validate the strategy by talking with experts, researching historical data, looking for analogous projects, reviewing lessons learned, etc. While it is not possible, with complete accuracy, to determine in advance the effectiveness of a risk response, past experience is the best guide. Failing to take into account the lessons learned from the past will likely lead to a repetition of the same mistakes. Knowledge gained from past projects should be captured in the lessons learned repository, and reviewing the information in the lessons learned repository might have prevented the same failed risk response from being selected for the current project.
Question 128:
In a marine construction project, the project manager is informed by the marine authority that the work permit will not be issued until certain environmental reinforcement work has been completed. After reviewing the project management plan, the reinforcement work is not included in the project scope. What should the project manager do?
Communicate with an officer in the environmental protection department to check if it is necessary
Organize a meeting with the team and update the work breakdown structure (WBS)
Raise this issue, and review and update the progress report for the next monthly project meeting
Start the organization’s change control process via a change request
QualityCorrect answerScheduleResourceCostOverall explanationCriticality analysis that determines which elements of the risk model have the greatest effect on the project critical path. A criticality index is calculated for each element in the risk model, which gives the frequency with which that element appears on the critical path during the simulation, usually expressed as a percentage. The output from a criticality analysis allows the project team to focus risk response planning efforts on those activities with the highest potential effect on the overall schedule performance of the project. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 434.
Question 129:
The project manager had learned that the project sponsor was unhappy with the development of the project requirements. What should the project manager do to realign the project with the sponsor’s expectations?
Review the risk management plan.
Confirm which templates the team should be using.
Review the project goal with the team.
Perform a stakeholder evaluation.
Use expert judgment to estimate all of the tasks and complete the schedule in the allocated timeAsk the sponsor to provide the desired completion date for project activities and complete the scheduleCorrect answerOrganize a planning session with the development team and use their estimations to complete the scheduleAsk the resource manager when the new contractor is available to start and change the delivery date for the project scheduleOverall explanationThe activities should be estimated by the team who are working on the task based on their velocity to be more accurate and reliable.
Question 130:
A project manager notifies the project sponsor that the mitigation strategy for a major risk did not work. The sponsor states that the same risk response was implemented a few months ago on a similar project with the same result. How might this situation have been avoided?
The project manager should have researched the lessons learned register for knowledge gained throughout similar past projects
The project manager could not have avoided this situation since it is impossible to determine in advance the effectiveness of a risk response
The project manager should have researched the lessons learned repository for knowledge gained throughout similar past projects
The project manager should have applied the avoidance risk response strategy because the risk had been seen before in past projects
Stakeholder registerChange logBacklog registerCorrect selectionRisk registerCorrect selectionIssue logOverall explanationThe project manager should update the issue log to record the errors and update the risk register because may be impact the project completion date.
Question 131:
You are using criticality analysis to determine risk impact. You have calculated an index for each risk and realize the more activities the risk impacts, the higher the index. The index is used as an input to a simulation. Which risk does criticality analysis assess?
Quality
Schedule
Resource
Cost
PerformingNormingSupportingCorrect answerStormingOverall explanationDuring this phase, the team begins to address the project work, technical decisions, and the project management approach. If team members are not collaborative or open to differing ideas and perspectives, the environment can become counterproductive. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 166.
Question 132:
A project manager is using a hybrid approach for project delivery. The development team was sized but is not yet fully resourced. The project manager is working on defining the project schedule. What should the project manager do to address the issue of developer availability?
Use expert judgment to estimate all of the tasks and complete the schedule in the allocated time
Ask the sponsor to provide the desired completion date for project activities and complete the schedule
Organize a planning session with the development team and use their estimations to complete the schedule
Ask the resource manager when the new contractor is available to start and change the delivery date for the project schedule
Place conflicts on a shared conflict list and ensure it is visible
Correct answerSort conflicts into two groups: positive and negative
Place conflicts into categories: structural and interpersonal
Review conflicts during daily Scrum so they are handled in a timely manner
Overall explanationConflict may have both positive and negative effects on a team. It can help the team operate better by exploring issues more fully, but it can lead to emotional problems that damage communication. So the correct answer is: Sort conflicts into two groups: positive and negative. PMBOK Guide7, Page 168.
Question 133:
A project manager led the implementation of an electronic invoicing project that has just been completed. The financial manager communicated that the team discovered three invoices with errors. Which two documents should the project manager update as soon as possible? (Choose two)
Stakeholder register
Change log
Backlog register
Risk register
Issue log
his helps in creating a cross-functional teamThis allows teams to self-organizeThis helps in forming smaller teamsCorrect answerThis removes the risk from the projectOverall explanationIn Agile communities, people with expertise in one domain, less-developed skills in associated areas and good collaboration skills are known as T-shaped people. For Agile projects, it is preferred to have a team of self-organizing, T-shaped, cross-functional team generalists. However, having T-shaped people doesn’t remove the project risk. Agile Practice Guide, Page 42
Question 134:
While you are in one of the first meetings for your new project that you have been assigned to early, two team members were discussing new ideas that each one thinks is correct and their opinion is the best for the project. You didn’t interact or cut the discussion, as you know this is a normal discussion in this phase, which is?
Performing
Norming
Supporting
Storming
Request a cancellation of the procurement contract with the supplier and impose a penaltyEscalate this issue to senior management, as the supplier is not following the procurement contractRequest a revision of the procurement contract to include specifications for the partsCorrect answerReview the procurement contract and ask the supplier to negotiate a solutionOverall explanationBefore any action, the project manager should review the contract and then take the appropriate decision.
Question 135:
A project manager is acting as a scrum master in a hybrid project and is dealing with a conflict between team members. What strategy should be used to handle this conflict?
Place conflicts on a shared conflict list and ensure it is visible
Sort conflicts into two groups: positive and negative
Place conflicts into categories: structural and interpersonal
Review conflicts during daily Scrum so they are handled in a timely manner
BacklogIssue log
Risk logCorrect answerChange logOverall explanationA change log is a record of requests for change (RFCs) submitted for all changes. A change log tracks the progress of each change from submission through review, approval, implementation and closure. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 185.
Question 136:
T-shaped people are more suitable for Agile teams than I-shaped people. All of the following are benefits of having T-shaped people on the team EXCEPT:
his helps in creating a cross-functional team
This allows teams to self-organize
This helps in forming smaller teams
This removes the risk from the project
Correct answerFollow the risk response planPrepare a change request
Update the risk registerUse the contingency fundOverall explanationKeyword (anticipated event) means that this risk was defined before and has a risk response plan. So The project manager should Follow the risk response plan to handle this anticipated event.
Question 137:
A project manager is made aware that there are defects in the parts provided by a supplier, which are causing delays in the testing phase. The supplier claims that all parts have been delivered as per the contract. If the defects are not fixed by the supplier within one week, the product release will be impacted. What should the project manager do?
Request a cancellation of the procurement contract with the supplier and impose a penalty
Escalate this issue to senior management, as the supplier is not following the procurement contract
Request a revision of the procurement contract to include specifications for the parts
Review the procurement contract and ask the supplier to negotiate a solution
Balanced Matrix Organization
Projectized Organization
Correct answerStrong Matrix Organization
Weak Matrix Organization
Overall explanationit’s clear that the project manager has full power to remove the overloaded tasks from team members, and because team members have many tasks besides the main tasks in the project so it’s Strong Org.
Question 138:
A project manager works for a large manufacturing company with diversified domains. The project team often participates in change requests Recently, the change control board (CCB) deferred some requests and the project manager wants to communicate these requests to the stakeholders. What document should the project manager use to communicate these requests?
Backlog
Issue log
Risk log
Change log
This is a contingency planThis is a residual riskThis is a secondary riskCorrect answerThis is a risk triggerOverall explanationTriggers are warning signs of an impending risk event (events or conditions that indicate that a risk is about to occur). PMBOK Guide 6, Page 417.
Question 139:
A project manager is working on a critical path activity and notices a delay in product delivery due to an anticipated event. What should the project manager do first?
Follow the risk response plan
Prepare a change request
Update the risk register
Use the contingency fund
Correct answerScrum MasterFunctional ManagerDevelopment teamDeveloperOverall explanationScrum Master is the coach of the development team and process owner in the Scrum framework. Removes obstacles, facilitates productive events, and defends the team from disruptions.
Question 140:
Your team members told you they are overloaded with many tasks. They are saying they have many tasks assigned to them besides the main tasks in the project. You promised them that you would clear the overloaded tasks. You are a Project manager in:
Balanced Matrix Organization
Projectized Organization
Strong Matrix Organization
Weak Matrix Organization
Track the number of customer support tickets that are opened and closed each month to see if it has decreasedCorrect answerConduct an NPS survey of customers before and after the project to see if the satisfaction rate has increasedNet Promoter Score cant be usedAsk customers to rate their satisfaction with the customer support they received on a scale of 1 to 5Overall explanationNet Promoter Score measures the degree to which a stakeholder (usually the customer) is willing to recommend a product or service to others. It measures a range from -100 to +100. A high Net Promoter Score not only measures satisfaction with a brand, product, or service, it is also an indicator of customer loyalty.NPS is the best way to measure customer satisfaction over time. By conducting an NPS survey of customers before and after the project, the project manager can see if the satisfaction rate has increased. This will give the project manager a clear indication of whether or not the project was successful. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 103.
Question 141:
Your hardware vendor left you a voicemail saying that a snowstorm in the Midwest might prevent your equipment from arriving on time and they are watching the weather closely. She wanted to give you a heads-up and asked that you return the call. Which of the following statements is true?
This is a contingency plan
This is a residual risk
This is a secondary risk
This is a risk trigger
Correct answerReviewed the communications management plan before inviting an external client representative to the meetingSent the presentation slides to internal participants first and then to the external client representative prior to the meetingPerformed a root cause analysis with the external client representative and documented the findings in the lessons learned registerReviewed the cost management plan with internal participants and CEO prior to inviting an external client representative to the meetingOverall explanationThe communications management plan includes the Information to communicate, Person or groups who will receive the information, including information about their needs, requirements, and expectations. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 377. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 186.
Question 142:
Tracking project impediments in a Scrum project is whose primary responsibility?
Scrum Master
Functional Manager
Development team
Developer
Return on investment (ROI)Internal rate of return (IRR)Cost-benefit analysisCorrect answerPayback periodOverall explanationThe payback period is used to determine the time needed to recover an investment. It is particularly useful when you want to assess how long it will take to recoup the initial investment in a project. In this scenario, you’re looking for the time required to recover the costs of upgrading the IT infrastructure. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 175.
Question 143:
A project manager is leading a team on a customer support project. The goal of the project is to improve the customer satisfaction rate. Which of the following is the best way to use Net Promoter Score to measure the success of the project?
Track the number of customer support tickets that are opened and closed each month to see if it has decreased
Conduct an NPS survey of customers before and after the project to see if the satisfaction rate has increased
Net Promoter Score cant be used
Ask customers to rate their satisfaction with the customer support they received on a scale of 1 to 5
SprintDaily scrumSprint reviewCorrect answerIncrementsOverall explanationIncrements is one of scrum artifacts. Other two Scrum artifacts include product backlog and Sprint Backlog. Agile Practice Guide, Page 101.
Question 144:
A project manager invites the company CEO, sponsor, team members, and an external client representative to a meeting to review the project management plan. The project manager starts to present the budget but the CEO suddenly asks to end the meeting. What should the project manager have done to avoid this situation?
Reviewed the communications management plan before inviting an external client representative to the meeting
Sent the presentation slides to internal participants first and then to the external client representative prior to the meeting
Performed a root cause analysis with the external client representative and documented the findings in the lessons learned register
Reviewed the cost management plan with internal participants and CEO prior to inviting an external client representative to the meeting
Correct answer$24,000
$20,000$36,000$30,000Overall explanationThe length of the sprint = 2 weeks. The team consists of 6 members. the billing rate is $50 per hour. Assuming a 40 hour week,, The burn rate per sprint = $50 *80 = $4000 for one member. The team consists of 6 members = $4000 *6= $24000
Question 145:
You are a project manager tasked with justifying a new project to senior management. The project involves upgrading the company’s IT infrastructure, and you want to determine the time needed to recover the investment. Which business justification analysis method should you use for this purpose?
Return on investment (ROI)
Internal rate of return (IRR)
Cost-benefit analysis
Payback period
Correct answerBy reviewing the released versions of the vendor’s workBy conducting procurement audits of the vendor’s processes
By attending the vendor team’s daily stand up meetings
By reviewing the weekly progress reports from the vendor
Overall explanationThe seventh guiding principle of the agile manifesto indicates, “Working software is the primary measure of progress.”
Question 146:
Scrum framework uses an iterative approach to deliver working product. Which of the following represents a scrum artifact?
Sprint
Daily scrum
Sprint review
Increments
Increase the project budget with the cost of the pilot technology.
Review the scope baseline with the stakeholder.
Correct answerInclude the stakeholder in the scope planning meetings.
Use the project reserve for the pilot technology.Overall explanationThe project manager should Include the stakeholder in the scope of planning meetings. Note that the meeting is one of the TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES in the PLAN SCOPE MANAGEMENT to develop the scope management plan. PMBOK 6, Page 136.
Question 147:
The sponsor of an Agile project approaches the Scrum Master and asks him about the burn rate of the team per sprint. The team consists of 6 members each of whose billing rate is $50 per hour. Assuming a 40 hour week and an iteration length of 2 weeks, what is the burn rate per sprint?
$24,000
$20,000
$36,000
$30,000
Planning for regular project updates to cover the status of critical deliverables
Correct answerDetermining and aligning performance indicators that will help in assessing successful delivery
Ensuring that the team is also focused on the overall change management plan
Ensuring that the scope management plan is in place to cover all related objectives
Overall explanationTo make sure that necessary measures are in place for a successful launch the project manager should be Determining and aligning performance indicators that will help in assessing successful delivery.
Question 148:
An agile project manager has contracted with a vendor to develop some of the deliverables required for the project. The vendor is also using an agile project management approach to deliver their work. How should the progress of the vendor be assessed?
By reviewing the released versions of the vendor’s work
By conducting procurement audits of the vendor’s processes
By attending the vendor team’s daily stand up meetings
By reviewing the weekly progress reports from the vendor
Correct answerSetting-based designGathering informationBuilding in resiliencePreparing for multiple outcomesOverall explanationIn this scenario, you are employing the approach of “set-based design.” Set-based design involves investigating multiple designs or alternatives early in the project to reduce uncertainty. It allows the project team to explore options, consider trade-offs, and learn from working with various alternatives. Ineffective or suboptimal alternatives are discarded throughout the process. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 119.
Question 149:
During the development of the scope management plan, the Marketing Manager requests the addition of an Online marketing tool into the project scope to assist with product marketing. What should the project manager do?
Increase the project budget with the cost of the pilot technology.
Review the scope baseline with the stakeholder.
Include the stakeholder in the scope planning meetings.
Use the project reserve for the pilot technology.
Implement the planned risk response to handle the issueReview possible alternative documentation methods with teamCorrect answerAsk the team to fix the system to resolve the issueUpdate the risk register with the risk and proposed impactOverall explanationKeyword ( A data breach occurred during the implementation ), so this is an issue and the project manager should ask the team to fix the system to resolve the issue. Option (Implement the planned risk response to handle the issue) is incorrect because the question does not mention that the risk was identified before.
Question 150:
You are a project manager for revamping an existing product. The marketing executive reaches out to the project manager to make sure that necessary measures are in place for a successful launch. As a project manager, you should focus on:
Planning for regular project updates to cover the status of critical deliverables
Determining and aligning performance indicators that will help in assessing successful delivery
Ensuring that the team is also focused on the overall change management plan
Ensuring that the scope management plan is in place to cover all related objectives
Management RiskTechnical RiskCommercial RiskCorrect answerExternal RiskOverall explanationRegulatory and Legislation considered as External Risks. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 406
Question 151:
You are the project manager for a complex engineering project, and you’ve identified a significant area of uncertainty regarding the choice of materials for a critical component. There are several potential materials available, each with its own advantages and disadvantages. To address this uncertainty, you decide to explore multiple design alternatives early in the project to reduce uncertainty. What approach are you employing in this scenario?
Setting-based design
Gathering information
Building in resilience
Preparing for multiple outcomes
Review sprint progress with the project team members
Review sprint planning procedures with the project team members
Correct answerPerform a sprint retrospective with the project team membersSet up one-on-one meetings with the project team members
Overall explanationIn order to determine the cause of an issue, it is appropriate to engage the team in determining what could be causing the issue. Discussing with the team during the iteration retrospective is an appropriate way to look for causes and remedies. An iteration retrospective is an excellent venue for discussing both what is and isn’t working. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 180, Agile Practice Guide, Page 50.
Question 152:
A company has decided to implement a new archiving system. A data breach occurred during the implementation of the project. What should the project manager do first?
Implement the planned risk response to handle the issue
Review possible alternative documentation methods with team
Ask the team to fix the system to resolve the issue
Update the risk register with the risk and proposed impact
Correct answerLeading indicatorsDescriptive indicatorsLagging indicatorsQualitative indicatorsOverall explanationLeading indicators are used to predict future project performance and enable proactive actions. They provide early warning signs that can help project managers take corrective measures before issues become critical. PMBOK Guide7, Page 96.
Question 153:
The risk breakdown structure (RBS) helps the project team consider the full range of sources from which individual project risks that may arise. The second Level of RBS includes Regulatory and Legislation. In Which Category are these risks included?
Management Risk
Technical Risk
Commercial Risk
External Risk
Start implementation for the new features requestedComplete stories that were left out in the sprintCorrect answerSpend time to reflect on currently used processes and how they can be improved in the retrospective meetingUpdate the backlog and estimate for the new features requestedOverall explanationThe Next step after the review meeting is a retrospective meeting. So the team should Spend time reflecting on currently used processes and how they can be improved in the retrospective meeting.
Question 154:
Although the team delivered the required features, they encountered several issues and conflicts during the sprint. Team members were upset about this experience and are now showing a lack of motivation due to what has occurred. What can the project manager do to help increase the team’s motivation and engagement with the project?
Review sprint progress with the project team members
Review sprint planning procedures with the project team members
Perform a sprint retrospective with the project team members
Set up one-on-one meetings with the project team members
Correct answerAsk your functional manager to provide evidence for his argumentSuspend the junior project managerReport to PMIAsk your project manager to provide evidence for his/her PMP certificationOverall explanationOne of the mandatory standards in the PMI Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct is respect. A project manager must listen to others’ points of view and understand them. However, before asking the junior project manager for evidence of his or her PMP certification, you must ask your functional manager to provide evidence to support his or her allegations. You can suspend the junior project manager or report him or her to PMI if there is sufficient evidence of his or her guilt. PMI Code of Ethics and Professional Responsibility.
Question 155:
As a project manager, you want to assess the performance of your ongoing construction project. You are looking for indicators that can help you predict future project outcomes and take proactive actions. Which type of key performance indicator (KPI) should you focus on in this situation?
Leading indicators
Descriptive indicators
Lagging indicators
Qualitative indicators
Correct answerThe project team has a colocated space and is capable of working togetherThe project scope can be decomposed into smaller parts, the first representing a minimum viable product (MVP)The project is an information technology project and has minimal impact to the organizationThe project scope is well defined and the requirements are prioritizedOverall explanationIdeally, agile teams are colocated in a team space. Team members are 100% dedicated to the teams. Agile encourages self managing teams, where team members decide who will perform the work within the next period’s defined scope. Agile Practice Guide, Page 39.
Question 156:
The Agile team has just completed the sprint review and the feedback on the product increment was mostly positive, but a few new features have been called out. What do you think the team should do first after the review meeting?
Start implementation for the new features requested
Complete stories that were left out in the sprint
Spend time to reflect on currently used processes and how they can be improved in the retrospective meeting
Update the backlog and estimate for the new features requested
Crash the project timeline to ensure the project is back on schedule.
Issue a change request to extend the project schedule based on identified delays.
Inform the stakeholders that the project will be delayed due to previous team management.
Correct answerConduct a meeting with the project team to discuss end address the sources of disagreement.
Overall explanationThe project manager should be proactive and conduct a meeting with the project team to discuss and address the sources of disagreement.
Question 157:
A functional manager in your organization has recently filed a complaint against a junior project manager regarding his project management certification. The functional manager claims that the PMP certification claimed by the junior project manager is invalid and needs to be checked. What should be your response as a senior project manager?
Ask your functional manager to provide evidence for his argument
Suspend the junior project manager
Report to PMI
Ask your project manager to provide evidence for his/her PMP certification
Escalate the stakeholder issue to the project sponsor
Develop a specific communications strategy for this stakeholder
Use interpersonal skills to gain stakeholder engagement
Correct answerAssess the impact of the stakeholder and engage properly
Overall explanationThe project manager should assess the impact of the stakeholder and engage properly. PMBOK Guide 7, Page 33
Question 158:
An executive sponsor of a predictive project asked a project manager experienced in agile to assess if a project could be executed using an agile approach. What factor should the project manager consider when determining if the project is suitable for an agile approach?
The project team has a colocated space and is capable of working together
The project scope can be decomposed into smaller parts, the first representing a minimum viable product (MVP)
The project is an information technology project and has minimal impact to the organization
The project scope is well defined and the requirements are prioritized
Force an agile framework to satisfy the project teamCorrect answerFacilitate a compromise by adopting a hybrid approachAvoid the conflict by escalating the issue to the project sponsorEmphasize the commonalities between both approachesOverall explanationUsing an agile approach for product development and then a predictive approach for training should resolve the conflict. The hybrid approach is the logical choice based on the limited information provided in the scenario.
Question 159:
The new project manager just started leading a project team from which the previous project manager resigned. After a quick evaluation of this project, it is apparent that team morale is low due to continuous disagreement about how to complete tasks. Tasks are taking longer than forecasted and the project is off schedule. What should the project manager do?
Crash the project timeline to ensure the project is back on schedule.
Issue a change request to extend the project schedule based on identified delays.
Inform the stakeholders that the project will be delayed due to previous team management.
Conduct a meeting with the project team to discuss end address the sources of disagreement.
Correct answer0.8325 story pointsSPI cannot be determined from the given information.36 story pointsOverall explanationIf the team worked at only 83% story points the SPI is 0.83. Productivity of 83% means that the team was only able to complete 25 story points during the iteration. Agile Practice Guide, Page 69.
Question 160:
A company is running a project to eliminate a sales channel that has been unprofitable for the past 3 years. A key stakeholder from another area, who has legacy ties to that sales channel, objects to the project. What should the project manager do in this situation?
Escalate the stakeholder issue to the project sponsor
Develop a specific communications strategy for this stakeholder
Use interpersonal skills to gain stakeholder engagement
Assess the impact of the stakeholder and engage properly
Move one of the team members to a different project team.
Correct answerReview the ground rules for collaboration within the team.Modify the communications management plan and resend it to the team.
Report the performance issue to both of the team members’ supervisors.
Overall explanationTo resolve this issue, the project manager should review the ground rules for collaboration within the team. Ground rules defined in the team charter set the expected behavior for project team members, as well as other stakeholders, with regard to stakeholder engagement. Agile Practice Guide, Page 50.
Question 161:
You are a project manager for the internal project that will deliver a new tool to the performing organization for use by its employees. A conflict occurred between the project team and the training manager. The team wants to use short development cycles to gain early feedback and manage the high rate of change coming from the employees. The training manager, on the other hand, insists on creating a detailed training plan upfront to train the employees. What is the best way for the project manager to resolve the conflict?
Force an agile framework to satisfy the project team
Facilitate a compromise by adopting a hybrid approach
Avoid the conflict by escalating the issue to the project sponsor
Emphasize the commonalities between both approaches
Power influence gridSalience model
Power user gridCorrect answerPersonasOverall explanationKeyword ( understand the types of likely users ). A persona is NOT a real person. They represents someone who could be real. Used to help the team focus on who the system’s users are or the users they really want. A fictional character created to represent an individual or group of stakeholders, termed a user class. Created to represent a user type that might use a site, brand, or product similarly. For an individual class, a persona can include any number of descriptive features the team decides are worth capturing—for example, a name, narrative, goals, behaviors, motivations, hobbies, environment, and/or skills.
Question 162:
If an Agile team planned to complete 30 story points in an iteration but worked at only 83% of the rate planned. What is the project’s SPI?
0.83
25 story points
SPI cannot be determined from the given information.
36 story points
Incorporate a predictive approach for this elementImplement mitigation strategies for this elementRequest additional team members to help with improvementsCorrect answerRetrospect frequently and suggest improvementsOverall explanationRecurring retrospectives regularly check on the effectiveness of the quality processes. They look for the root cause of issues then suggest trials of new approaches to improve quality. Subsequent retrospectives evaluate any trial processes to determine if they are working and should be continued or new adjusting or should be dropped from use. Agile PRactice Guide, Page 93.
Question 163:
A project team is experiencing conflict between two team members. Team member A feels that team member B is always talking over team member A and does not listen to any advice. Team member B is not willing to listen to feedback. What should the project manager do to resolve the issue?
Move one of the team members to a different project team.
Review the ground rules for collaboration within the team.
Modify the communications management plan and resend it to the team.
Report the performance issue to both of the team members’ supervisors.
Correct answerCheck if the activity is on critical path
Report to senior management
Allow team members to change the activityIgnore change in activities
Overall explanationThe project manager should check first if the activity is on the critical path, which means it has no float, so any dealy in the activity means a delay in the whole project, and a change request is required for the schedule baseline.
Question 164:
A project team is executing a large regulatory project comprised of a multitude of internal and external stakeholders. An initial impact analysis revealed several systems, including an enhancement to existing modules as well as new builds. After completion of the initial design workshop, the team conducted a brainstorming session to better understand the types of likely users. Which technique will best serve this purpose?
Power influence grid
Salience model
Power user grid
Personas
Correct answerRetrospectivesBacklogSprintsUser stories
Overall explanationRecurring retrospectives regularly check on the effectiveness of the quality process. They look for the root cause of issues then suggest trials of new approaches to improve quality. PMBOK Guide 6, Page 276
Question 165:
During the third iteration, the team encounters a major delay that has not had significant improvements over the last few weeks What should the project manager do?
Incorporate a predictive approach for this element
Implement mitigation strategies for this element
Request additional team members to help with improvements
Retrospect frequently and suggest improvements
Industry trends and the technical approachLength of time each feature has been on the backlogCorrect selectionComplexity and the cost of developmentCorrect selectionCost of delaying some features against business valueReusing components from another productOverall explanationThe Two items should be taken into account first to review and update the product backlog priorities during the meeting: 1- Complexity and the cost of development. 2- Cost of delaying some features against business value.
Question 166:
Your team member wants to make technical changes to an activity, which will add more time to that activity. As a project manager, what is the first thing to do?
Check if the activity is on critical path
Report to senior management
Allow team members to change the activity
Ignore change in activities
Monitor the project sponsor but understand that it is normal to spend more money in the design phase of a project.Correct answerStop crashing the schedule
Use a resource-leveling techniqueManage the project sponsor closely and revise the project’s resource management plan to improve indicatorsOverall explanationThe (SPI) is 1.8 and (CPI) is 0.1, indicate that the project is ahead of schedule and over budget. To handle this situation and mitigate the sponsor’s concerns, the project manager should stop crashing the schedule because the CPI is very low and the project is ahead of schedule, and no need to more crashing.
Question 167:
Which of the following is an agile technique that regularly checks the effectiveness of the quality process, looks for the root cause of issues, and suggests trials of new approaches to improve quality?
Retrospectives
Backlog
Sprints
User stories
Inform all the other project managerIdentify and control the resource responsible for the mistakesCorrect answerCapture the findings in the lessons learned repositoryUpdate the quality management planOverall explanationThe project manager should capture the findings in the lessons learned repository to ensure that this doesn’t happen in the future projects.
